JP6747417B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Displacement is Yu TECHNICAL machine you assist electrical wiring (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-157474 A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of members. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the number of members.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine comprises a displacing means configured to be displaceable and electric wiring connected to the displacing means, and a driving means for generating a driving force. And a transmission unit configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement unit by being displaced in a predetermined direction between the first position and the second position by the driving force of the driving unit. The electric wiring is fixed at a predetermined portion outside the displacement means, the displacement means includes a guide portion for guiding the electric wiring, and is displaced based on displacement of the transmission means in the predetermined direction, When the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, the displacement means based on the displacement of the transmission means in the predetermined direction. When the guide portion is displaced in the predetermined direction by the displacement of and the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction from the predetermined position to the second position, the displacement based on the displacement of the transmission means in the predetermined direction. Compared with the case where the guide portion is displaced toward the opposite side of the predetermined direction by the displacement of the displacement means and the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction from the first position to the predetermined position, The displacement amount of the guide portion with respect to the displacement amount is reduced .

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the load on the electric wiring can be reduced .

According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1, the board can be housed in the board box .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the left side production unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the left side production unit in the VIIa-VIIa line of FIG. 6, (b) is sectional drawing of the left side production unit in the VIIb-VIIb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the VIII-VIII line of FIG. It is a front view of a base plate. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine taken along a line corresponding to line XX in FIG. 9. It is a rear view of the right performance unit. It is an exploded rear view of the right performance unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right effect unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating left lid part and a rotating body. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body and a rotating right lid part. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the compound operation unit of the 1st operation unit. (A) is a front exploded perspective view of a part of structure of a rotation unit, (b) is a perspective view which shows typically the harness which comprises an electric wiring. 31A is a top view of the guide member, FIG. 31B is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and electric wiring taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31A, and FIG. 31C is FIG. 31A. 31D is a cross-sectional view of the guide member and the electric wiring taken along line XXXIc-XXXIc, FIG. 31D is a cross-sectional view of the guide member taken along line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. 31A, and FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a guide member and electric wiring taken along line XXXIe-XXXIe of FIG. FIG. 7A is a left side view of the combined operation unit, FIG. 7B is a front view of the combined operation unit, and FIG. 7C is a right side view of the combined operation unit. FIG. 7A is a left side view of the combined operation unit, FIG. 7B is a front view of the combined operation unit, and FIG. 7C is a right side view of the combined operation unit. FIG. 7A is a left side view of the combined operation unit, FIG. 7B is a front view of the combined operation unit, and FIG. 7C is a right side view of the combined operation unit. (A) to (f) are front views of the third symbol display device and the first operation unit, which schematically show the third symbol display device and the first operation unit. (A) And (b) is a left side view of a driven plate of a detection sensor and a rotation right lid part. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a fixed base member, a displacement base member, a drive means, a transmission means, and a biasing means. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a fixed base member, a displacement base member, a drive means, a transmission means, and a biasing means. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a to-be-supported means and a connection means. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a to-be-supported means and a connection means. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rendering means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering means. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 2nd operation unit in the plane which extends in the horizontal direction through the columnar fastening part of the support means. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a termination gear. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 50. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit in the LVI-LVI line of FIG. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 51. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along the line LVIII-LVIII in FIG. 52. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment in the XX line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a front perspective view of a small diameter collar. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right side production unit in a 4th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right effect unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 58, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape and an outer frame 11 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface that projects toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby a ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. It is attached to the back surface side (or front surface side) (see 1).

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmissive resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is located inside the outer rail 62 similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1 ). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61, 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in positive change, shortening time, or normal by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of big jackpot is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability variation. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor time saving (state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is improved).

During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than in the normal case. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probable change or shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal state. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a opens at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Further, during the probability change or time saving, the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not changed, and the second symbol Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal case.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. Moreover, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric prize 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or the shortened time, the second winning port 640 may be increased during the probability change or the shortened time by other methods such as increasing the winning probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball shot on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be two, for example.

Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be on the left or right of the variable display device unit 80 or below. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning opening 640. , The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the shortening of the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability that the jackpot is the same when the ball is won at the first winning opening 64 and when it is won at the second winning opening 640 is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning accessory 640a is provided. To the left, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the through gate 67 is passed to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game board 13 has a bilaterally symmetrical configuration, the player can also aim at the first winning opening 64 with "right hitting" or the second with "left hitting". You can also aim for the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the probability is changing, is being shortened, or is normally), how to shoot a ball to the player. It is not necessary to change "to left" and "to right". Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the player cannot hit the first winning opening 64 with "right hitting" so that the ball fired with "left hitting" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is during a probable change, during a shortening time, or during a normal time), how to shoot a ball to the player. Can be requested to change to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding a game property that changes how to hit the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times in a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the second winning opening 640.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the front-back direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open/close and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205. ..

The input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive motors 441, 541, 731 and an electromagnetic solenoid 2086d.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to in the description of FIG.

As described above, the game board 13 includes rails 61, 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (not shown) on the base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, the window portion 60a opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 having a different shape, a left-side effect unit 150 arranged at a lower left portion of the center frame 86 and configured to be able to guide a ball to the general winning opening 63, and a variable winning device 65 are disposed on the base plate 60. Assemble a right-side performance unit 160 configured to be fit from the front side into a small window portion 60b to be opened, a ball flow-down unit (not shown) configured to allow the ball discharged from the game area to flow down, and the like. The outer peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The center frame 86, the left effect unit 150, and the right effect unit 160 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. ..

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plywood sheet in which veneer plates are stacked, and various structures are provided from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 except for the opening portions such as the window portion 60a and the small window portion 60b. It is configured to be shieldable so that the player cannot see the body.

As shown in FIG. 5, the left effect unit 150 is a unit formed of a light-transmissive resin material, is arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60, and has a plate shape having a width equivalent to that of the inner rail 61. Of the upper plate 151, a lower plate 152 extending downward from the left end of the upper plate 151 in the shape of a plate having the same width as the upper plate 151, and the lower plate 152 An opposing plate portion 153 formed in a flat plate shape connected to the end portion and the rear end portion of the upper plate portion 151 and arranged to face the front surface of the base plate 60, and a front side of the opposing plate portion 153. A plurality of members which are fastened and fixed to each other and have a bottom on the front side and which are open upward, and a bottomed semi-cylindrical sphere guide member 154, and an upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 at a position below the sphere guide member 154. Mainly includes a plurality of ridge portions 155 that are formed in a ridge shape extending upward from.

No opening is formed in the base plate 60 at a position opposed to the left effect unit 150, except for an opening corresponding to the general winning opening 63. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement (deformation) of the facing plate portion 153 by utilizing the rigidity of the base plate 60, so that the sphere on the front side of the facing plate portion 153 can be prevented regardless of the thickness of the facing plate portion 153. The downflow can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the facing plate portion 153 deviates from the ball guide member 154, and a ball determined not to win the general winning opening 63 (and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640) flows down. It is arranged on the back side of the path. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the facing plate portion 153 on the flow-down mode of the balls that may enter the winning openings 63, 64, 640.

In the present embodiment, while the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, the front side of the irradiation device (for example, the LED member 544 of the rotation unit 500, see FIG. 25) arranged on the back side of the base plate 60. It is possible to show the light emitted toward the player to the player through the opening corresponding to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a light emission effect in which only the ball guide member 154 arranged corresponding to the general winning opening 63 does not emit light, while the surrounding opposing plate portion 153, the upper plate portion 151, and the like do not emit light.

That is, for example, even if the distance between the light emitting means and the ball guide member 154 is large, the light is focused by the opening formed in the base plate 60 at the position corresponding to the general winning opening 63. It is possible to execute a light emission effect in which only the guide member 154 emits light. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED member 544 (see FIG. 25) of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is emitted from the LED member 544 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 63 without the need to provide a dedicated light emitting means for emitting light to the base plate 60. By arriving at the opening formed in, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that causes the ball guide member 154 to emit light.

This makes it possible to easily make a spot (for example, the general winning opening 63) where the player can benefit from the arrival of the ball in the game area. Hereinafter, the details of the left side rendering unit 150 will be described.

FIG. 6 is a front view of the left effect unit 150. As shown in FIG. 6, the projecting ridge portion 155 is a portion projecting from the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 in the form of a ridge over the front-rear direction, and is the first ridge portion arranged on the more upstream side. The portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 arranged downstream of the first ridge portion 156 are provided. The first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 have different shapes (protruding modes), but since the basic idea is the same, the details of the shape of the first ridge portion 156 will be described. Regarding the strip portion 157, the difference from the first protruding strip portion 156 will be described, and the detailed description will be omitted.

The first ridge portion 156 is configured such that four ridges having substantially the same shape are arranged in a staircase pattern. Since the ridges are formed in substantially the same shape in the front-rear direction, the ridges can come into contact with the sphere regardless of the front-rear position of the sphere, and the decelerating action of the sphere can be generated.

Each of the protrusions is arranged in each of the ranges vertically below the ball guide member 154, which are divided into four equal parts in the left-right direction. That is, since the vertical downward range of the ball guide member 154 is formed with a horizontal width of about 16 [mm], each protrusion is formed with a horizontal width of about 4 [mm].

Each of the ridges is configured such that the dimension in the up-down direction is gradually shortened toward the downstream side. This difference in vertical length is caused by adjusting the vertical length of the right side portion 156c of the ridge. Therefore, the upper side portion 156a and the curved portion 156b of the protrusion have the same shape in each protrusion. The details of the upper side portion 156a, the curved portion 156b, and the right side portion 156c will be described later.

As described above, the difference between the vertical lengths of the ridges is generated by adjusting the vertical length of the right side portion 156c of the ridges, so that the first ridge portion 156 has the same step width. On the other hand, it is formed in a staircase shape in which the vertical dimension of each step becomes smaller as it goes downward.

In particular, the maximum difference between the vertical dimension of the ridge at the left end and the vertical dimension of the ridge adjacent to it on the right side is about 0.35 [mm]. The size difference is about half (about 0.16 to 0.18 [mm]). The vertical dimension of each ridge will be described later.

According to this structure, the deceleration effect on the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the first protrusion 156 can be maximized at the first protrusion (the protrusion at the left end) and gradually reduced at the subsequent protrusions. .. As a result, a moderate load is applied to the sphere at a plurality of locations, so that the sphere can be sufficiently decelerated without causing local overload (stress concentration). In addition, compared with the case where the deceleration effect is unchanged for each ridge, the deceleration effect can be easily made to correspond to the speed change (speed decrease) of the ball rolling on the first ridge portion 156. As a result, excessive deceleration can be avoided, and it is possible to easily prevent the ball from stopping unintentionally.

In addition, in the 2nd protrusion part 157 mentioned later, the difference of the up-and-down dimension of adjacent protrusions is comprised by all equal (equal difference) (about 0.11 [mm]), and the up-down dimension of the protrusion at the left end is It does not adopt a configuration that is dramatically large. The vertical dimension of each ridge will be described later. The purpose of this is to keep the inclination of the lower plate portion 152 with respect to the horizontal so that it is not necessary to greatly decelerate the ball, and to prevent damage to the second ridge portion 157, which will be described later in detail.

Further, the outline of the game ball B1 that abuts on the curved portion 156b of the upstream ridge and the upper side portion 156a of the downstream ridge at a position where the adjacent ridges have the smallest vertical height is illustrated by an imaginary line. .. As shown in FIG. 6, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B1 is arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the upper side portion 156a.

By changing the abutting ridges and arranging the game balls that abut at the same two points, the upper and lower dimensions of the upstream ridges become larger as the abutting ridges become upstream ridges. The game ball is arranged on the right side, and naturally, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B1 is arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the upper side portion 156a.

Therefore, when the game ball B1 is arranged in a state of being sandwiched between the adjacent protrusions, the own weight of the game ball is directed toward the direction rolling toward the downstream side over the plurality of protrusions, so that the game balls are adjacent to each other. It is possible to avoid stopping in the state of being sandwiched between the strips.

The details of the configuration of each ridge provided in the first ridge portion 156 will be described. Each protrusion has an upper side portion 156a extending downward from the left end portion in a horizontal direction, a curved portion 156b continuously formed from the right end portion of the upper side portion 156a, and a lower right end portion of the curved portion 156b. From the right side portion 156c extending downward along the vertical direction.

Since the upper side portion 156a is configured as a flat surface portion that is inclined downward with respect to the horizontal direction in a front view and extends in the front-back direction in a planar manner, it is easy to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface from unintentionally stopping. can do. The length of the upper side portion 156a in front view is 3.15 [mm], the inclination angle of the upper side portion 156a with respect to the horizontal direction is about 7 degrees, and the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is about 35 degrees.

The curved portion 156b is a curved surface having a curved shape with a radius of about 1 [mm] when viewed from the front, and has a role of assisting the rolling of the sphere. That is, compared with the case where the curved portion 156b is configured as a corner portion, the contact between the ball and the ridge can be continued and the rolling state can be easily maintained, so that the effect of decelerating the ball is maintained. be able to.

The lower side portion 156c is designed to have a length of about 1.42 [mm], about 1.58 [mm], about 1.76 [mm], and about 2.11 [mm] in order from the downstream side. As a result, the vertical dimension of each protrusion is designed to be approximately 2.80 [mm], approximately 2.96 [mm], approximately 3.14 [mm], approximately 3.49 [mm] in order from the downstream side. It

Since the lower side portion 156c is configured as a flat surface portion that extends in the vertical direction when viewed from the front and extends in the front-back direction in a planar shape, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being displaced against the inclination of the lower plate portion 152. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the ball, which is about to be displaced in the direction away from the outlet 71 (see FIG. 2), toward the outlet 71.

The angle of the lower side portion 156c with respect to the horizontal direction is about 90 degrees, and the angle with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is about 56 degrees. As described above, the inclination angle of the ridge with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is configured such that the angle with respect to the downstream lower plate portion 152 is larger than the angle with respect to the upstream lower plate portion 152.

As a result, for a ball that reaches the ridge from the upstream side, the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface is reduced, and a small deceleration action that does not stop is generated, while a ball that reaches the ridge from the downstream side. On the other hand, by increasing the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface, it is possible to effectively reduce the velocity of the sphere moving toward the upstream side and facilitate the flow of the sphere toward the downstream side.

The second ridge portion 157 is configured such that the vertical width of each ridge is shorter than that of the first ridge portion 156, and this difference makes the length of the right side portion 156c of the second ridge portion 157 different. Caused by. Therefore, the shape of the upper side portion 156a, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction (that is, about 7 degrees), the shape of the curved portion 156b, and the like are similarly configured in each protrusion.

On the other hand, the lower plate portion 152 has a curved shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the upper right side, and compared with the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction) in the vicinity of the first ridge portion 156, Since the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction) near the second protruding portion 157 is smaller, the angle between each protruding portion of the second protruding portion 157 and the lower plate portion 152 is the first protruding portion. The part 156 is different from that described above.

That is, the length of the upper side portion 156a of the second protruding portion 157 in front view is 3.15 [mm], the angle of the upper side portion 156a with respect to the lower plate portion 152 is about 19 degrees, and the lower side of the right side portion 156c. The angle with respect to the plate portion 152 is about 70 degrees. As described above, the inclination angle of the first ridge 156 with respect to the lower plate portion 152 of the ridge is larger than the above-described numerical value, and the inclination angle of the ridge of the lower plate 152 of the downstream side is smaller than that of the lower plate portion 152 of the upstream side. The angle with respect to the portion 152 is larger.

As a result, the first ridge portion 156 has a larger deceleration action than that described above, and for a ball that reaches the ridge from the upstream side, the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface is small and the sphere does not stop. On the other hand, for a ball that reaches the ridge from the downstream side, by increasing the change in the inclination angle of the rolling surface, the speed of the ball moving toward the upstream side is effectively reduced, and the ball moves toward the downstream side. Can be made easier to flow to.

The lower side portion 156c of the second ridge portion 157 has a length of about 0.16 [mm], about 0.27 [mm], about 0.38 [mm], and about 0.49 [mm] in order from the downstream side. Designed in As a result, the vertical dimension of each ridge is designed to be about 1.54 [mm], about 1.65 [mm], about 1.76 [mm], and about 1.87 [mm] in order from the downstream side. It

Compared with the ridges of the first ridge portion 156, the ridges of the second ridge portion 157 have shorter vertical dimensions in each step, and the difference in the vertical dimension between adjacent ridges. Are all equal (equal difference (about 0.11 [mm])). That is, since the configuration in which the vertical dimension of the leftmost protrusion is dramatically large is not adopted, it is possible to make the deceleration rate of the ball rolling on the upper surface uniform, and take measures against the vulnerability of the leftmost portion. As a result, the durability of the second protrusion can be improved.

The left effect unit 150 includes a diffusing portion 158 having a diffusing shape capable of diffusing light on the front end surfaces of the upper plate portion 151 and the lower plate portion 152. The diffusing unit 158 plays a linear light by diffusing the light reaching the left-hand rendering unit 150 from the front side or the light reaching from the upper, lower, left, right, or rear side via the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). It can be shown to the person, and the effect of production can be improved.

Since the diffusing portion 158 is also formed on the front end faces of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157, the diffusing portion 158 can be partially widened. Accordingly, the width of the light visually recognized by the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 is visually recognized around it (where neither the first ridge portion 156 nor the second ridge portion 157 is formed). The width of the light can be increased.

In addition, the maximum width of the light visually recognized by the diffusion section 158 on the front side of the first protruding section 156 is made larger than the maximum width of the light visually recognized by the diffusion section 158 on the front side of the second protruding section 157. be able to. More specifically, the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusing portion 158 can be changed stepwise in accordance with the above-mentioned vertical dimensions of the respective protrusions, and the upper and lower portions of the protrusions in the second protrusion portion 157 can be changed. The ridge having the smallest vertical dimension among the ridges in the first ridge portion 156 has a larger vertical dimension than the ridge having the largest dimension, so that the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the first ridge portion 156 is larger. The width of the light visually recognized at can be made larger than the width of the light visually recognized at the diffusion portion 158 on the front side of the second protruding portion 157.

As a result, the degree of attention of the player looking at the left-side effect unit 150 can be made different for each range. That is, the degree of attention of the second ridge portion 157 is higher than the degree of attention of a portion that is neither the first ridge portion 156 nor the second ridge portion 157, and the degree of attention of the second ridge portion 157 is higher than that of the second ridge portion 157. The degree of attention of the first ridge portion 156 can be increased.

A ball guide member 154 arranged corresponding to the general winning opening 63 is arranged above the first ridges 156 and the second ridges 157 whose attention is increased. Since the player's basic game posture is such that he/she looks down at the general winning opening 63 and the ball guide member 154 arranged on the front side thereof, the player is placed below the ball guide member 154 in the field of view. There is a high possibility that the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 will enter.

Then, by increasing the degree of attention of the first protruding portion 156 and the second protruding portion 157 (by irradiating light), the player can easily understand the left and right positions of the general winning opening 63. As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening 63 and the ball guide member 154 arranged on the front side thereof easier to be noticed.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the degree of attention of the first protrusion portion 156 and the second protrusion portion 157 without directly illuminating the general winning opening 63 or the ball guide member 154 or decorating them glitteringly. It is possible to improve (make conspicuous) the attention of the general winning opening 63 and the ball guide member 154.

Further, the width of the light visually recognized in the diffusing portion 158 is configured to change depending on the vertical dimension of each ridge, but the vertical dimension of the ridge at the left end of the first ridge portion 156 is significantly large. Since it is configured, it is possible to exert an effect of strongly attracting the line of sight of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the leftmost ridge of the first ridge 156, which is the most upstream position where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the upper plate 151 lands.

Moreover, since the width of the light visually recognized by the diffusing section 158 is configured to change depending on the vertical dimension of each protrusion, the width of the light is gradually reduced toward the downstream side (right side). It As a result, the light that gradually becomes thinner toward the downstream of the game area can be visually recognized through the diffusion section 158, so that the trajectory of the sphere can be indicated by the light and the outer edge of the game area has a different thickness. By decorating with light (tapering light), a sharp appearance can be formed, and an effect as a light emission effect can be obtained.

FIG. 6 illustrates the downflow paths L1 and L2 as main examples of the downflow paths of the sphere. The downflow path L1 is a path through which the sphere reaching the upper plate portion 151 falls after falling from the right end portion of the upper plate portion 151, and the downflow path L1 moves down the ball on the upstream side of the first protruding portion 156. The upper surface of the plate portion 152 is reached (landed).

The downflow path L2 is a path through which a sphere that flows over a nail (not shown) and flows down to the right without reaching the upper plate portion 151 flows down between the pair of ball guide members 154. There, the sphere that has flowed down in the flow-down path L2 reaches (lands) on the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 on the upstream side of the second protruding portion 157.

In this way, the first ridges 156 and the second ridges 157 are formed in a range different from the range in which the spheres flowing down in the sphere flow paths L1 and L2 reach the lower plate part 152 (landing). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impact when the ball arrives (land) from being applied to the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157.

In addition, since the first ridges 156 and the second ridges 157 are arranged on the downstream side of the reach (landing) range of the balls, the spheres that have flowed down in the flow-down paths L1 and L2 are supplied to the outlet 71. You can slow down before you reach it. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the portion arranged in the path to the outlet 71 from being damaged by the load (impact) received from the ball.

When the ball rolling on the lower plate portion 152 starts to contact the first ridge portion 156, the repulsive force applied to the sphere from the first ridge portion 156 is directed rightward without depending on the side where the ball reaches. Therefore, it is possible to avoid stopping the ball. On the other hand, since the direction of the repulsive force depends on the shape of each protrusion, it greatly differs depending on the side on which the ball reaches.

For example, when the sphere reaches (starts contact with) the first protruding portion 156 from the upstream side (left side), the direction of the repulsive force occurs in the direction perpendicular to the upper side portion 156a. Become. On the other hand, when the sphere reaches (starts contact with) the first ridge portion 156 from the downstream side (right side), the direction of the repulsive force is not in contact with the right side portion 156c and is perpendicular to the curved portion 156b. Although it occurs in the right direction, the load F2 is almost rightward.

Therefore, a speed change in the left-right direction can be gently generated for a sphere arriving from the upstream side, and a left-right speed change can be violently generated for a sphere arriving from the downstream side ( Can be reversed).

The ball may bounce back to the left by colliding with another ball arranged near the out port 71 or by colliding with a component member arranged on the front side of the out port 71. Although this ball is unlikely to reach the first ridge 156, it is more likely to reach the second ridge 157 near the out port 71 because of its lower placement.

Therefore, although the second protrusion 157 is provided at a position deviated from the landing position of the ball flowing down along the downflow paths L1 and L2 by being formed below the ball guide member 154, it bounces off due to the above circumstances. Since the ball may collide with the second ridge 157, if the second ridge 157 is fragile, the impact of the ball collision may damage the second ridge 157. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the respective protrusions of the second protrusion portion 157 are configured such that the difference in the vertical dimension between the adjacent protrusions is equal (equal difference), and the vertical dimension of the protrusion at the left end is equal. Does not adopt a configuration that is dramatically larger. As a result, the second ridge portion 157 can be configured to be less likely to be damaged as compared with the case where the specific ridge is configured to be excessively sharp.

Further, since each of the ridges is formed so as to project from the upper surface of the lower plate portion 152 in the front-rear direction, the second ridges are formed as compared with the case where the ridges are projected in the shape of a corner. The portion 157 can be configured so as not to be easily damaged.

FIG. 7A is a cross-sectional view of the left effect unit 150 taken along the line VIIa-VIIa in FIG. 6, and FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of the left effect unit 150 taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b), the wall thicknesses of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 are equal, and a concave portion having a depth corresponding to the opposite side of the ridge is formed. A groove is formed. By making the thicknesses equal, it is possible to maintain a high molding accuracy of the left-side effect unit 150 formed of a resin material.

As described above, while the first ridges 156 and the second ridges 157 are formed to have the same thickness, the diffusion portion 158 includes the first ridges 156 and the first ridges 156 so as to cover the concave groove from the front side. The protrusion is formed below the second protruding portion 157. That is, the diffusion portion 158 is formed with a width dimension equal to or larger than the wall thickness of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157.

As described above, since the first ridge portion 156 has a longer vertical dimension of each ridge than the second ridge portion 157, the first ridge portion 156 is also the second ridge portion of the concave groove. Deeper than part 157. Correspondingly, with respect to the width dimension (maximum value) of the diffusing section 158, the diffusing section 158 disposed on the front side of the first protruding section 156 is closer to the front side of the second protruding section 157. It is longer than the diffusion portion 158 provided.

As a result, the width of the diffusing portion 158 can be increased regardless of the wall thickness of the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157. Therefore, the width of the light visually recognized through the diffusing portion 158 can be widened. You can

As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the diffusion portion 158 and the first ridge portion 156 and the second ridge portion 157 that are continuous with the upper end portion of the diffusion portion 158. The presence/absence of a ball entering the general winning opening 63 can be grasped by viewing from the direction of the two ridges 157. This will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the line of sight YE1 of the player who plays the game is often along a line (radial line) extending outward from the game area toward the rear side. Therefore, the player's line-of-sight YE1 looking at the ridge portion 155 corresponding to the lower edge of the game area is a directional view in which the line of sight YE1 is inclined downward toward the rear side.

The player who looks in the direction of the line of sight YE1 can see not only the ridges 155 intersecting the line of sight YE1 but also the light reflected by the ridges 155. That is, the reflected light R1 that enters the ridge portion 155 through the facing plate portion 153 and is reflected along the line of sight YE1 can be seen through the ridge portion 155.

The reflected light R1 is light that travels downward through the sphere guide member 154, enters (reflects) the facing plate 153, and then enters (reflects) the ridge 155. That is, the light source of the reflected light R1 is arranged above the sphere guide member 154, and the opposed plate portion 153 serves as a reflection means (for example, a mirror), so that the reflected light R1 reaches the ridge portion 155. ..

As described above, the reflected light R1 is light that passes through the path through which the sphere guide member 154 passes through the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, when the projection portion 155 is viewed with the line of sight YE1, a sphere is reflected on the projection portion 155 or the projection portion 155 looks dark due to the light being blocked by the ball. As a result, the player can recognize the presence/absence of a ball entering the general winning opening 63 through the change in the reflected light R1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player efficiently grasp the profitable information while reducing the fatigue of the player. This will be described below.

Conventionally, in a game when the game state is normal, a player often moves his or her line of sight between the general winning opening 63 and the vicinity of the inner rail 61. This is to obtain information useful for the game from the flowing state of the ball in the game area.

Firstly, when a ball enters the general winning opening 63, prize balls (5 to 15 balls in the present embodiment) are paid out, so that the higher the frequency of entering the general winning opening 63, the more the game is being played. It can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 has good ball holding. Secondly, as the frequency of arrival of the ball near the inner rail 61 is higher, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 during the game is more likely to discharge the ball from the outlet 71. At first glance, it seems that the less frequent the balls reach the inner rail 61, the more profitable the pachinko machine 10 is for the player, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

It is incomplete to understand this information individually, and it is necessary to understand it comprehensively. For example, just because the ball rarely reaches the vicinity of the inner rail 61, it is not known whether the pachinko machine 10 is profitable to the player.

Even in this case, if the frequency of entering the general winning opening 63 is excessively high, the frequency of entering the first winning opening 64 becomes low, and therefore the frequency of the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 during the game is large. Is considered to be low. Therefore, it can be expected that it will take a long time to win the jackpot, so there is a high possibility that a player with a short playable time will not be suitable for the game (it may not be said that there is a profit for the player). high).

From this point of view, the player needs to move the line of sight between the general winning opening 63 and the vicinity of the inner rail 61 to obtain information at each location. However, when the line of sight is moved many times, the player's fatigue becomes great, and the player's motivation for the game is likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the present embodiment is configured so that information at a plurality of locations can be obtained without moving the line of sight. That is, the frequency of arrival of the ball near the inner rail 61 and the frequency of arrival of the ball at the general winning opening 63 can be grasped without moving the line of sight from the line of sight YE1 looking at the ridge portion 155. As a result, the player's fatigue can be reduced and the player's motivation for the game can be prevented, while allowing the player to efficiently grasp profitable information.

It should be noted that the presence/absence of a ball entering the general winning opening 63 can be grasped if the mode of the reflected light R1 changes. Therefore, the degree of reflection of light through the facing plate portion 153 is not limited at all, and various modes are available. Give an example. For example, it may be textured to have a low light reflection efficiency, or may be mirror-finished or have another member having a mirror surface (a seal member or a mirror-like member) arranged to reflect light. May be higher.

Further, the angle between the plate front surface of the facing plate portion 153 and the plate front surface of the base plate 60 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, they may be parallel to each other, or the plate front surface of the facing plate portion 153 may be configured as an inclined surface. Accordingly, it is possible to favorably correspond to the position of the light source of the reflected light R1.

FIG. 8 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line VIII-VIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the sphere that has reached (landed) the lower plate portion 152 flows down the down path L3 toward the lower side of the game area.

The ball flowing down in the flow-down path L3 reaches the front side of the outlet 71 while hitting the glass unit 16 (front side) or the base plate 60 (rear side), and then passes through the outlet 71 and is discharged from the game area.

When the sphere has a strong momentum, the sphere protruding rightward from the lower end of the lower plate portion 152 may collide with the movable accessory 640a. If the movable accessory 640a is damaged by this collision, it becomes difficult to continue a normal game, so it is desirable to avoid the collision of the ball with the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the front design member FD1 formed of a light-transmissive resin is disposed on the front side of the movable accessory 640a, and since the movable accessory 640a is covered with the front design member FD1, the movable accessory 640a. It is difficult to notice the damage of the. From this, it is required to prevent the movable accessory 640a from being damaged, and it is desirable to avoid the ball from colliding with the movable accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 155 is provided in the flow-down path L3 to decelerate the ball, so that the ball protruding rightward from the lower end of the lower plate portion 152 reaches the movable accessory 640a. The ball's momentum has fallen below the momentum needed for it. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the movable accessory 640a from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 8, the ridge portion 155 is arranged at a position included in the lateral width of the ball guide member 154 in a top view. In detail, in the ball guide member 154, the total of the left and right width of the passage path of the ball and the left and right widths of the pair of fastening portions arranged on the left and right sides thereof is equal to the left and right width of the protruding portion 155 (about 16 [mm ]) The above is configured.

Thereby, the ball guide member 154 can be used as a protection member for the ridge portion 155. That is, when the sphere falls toward the ridge portion 155, the sphere guide member 154 interferes with the fall path of the sphere, so that the fall path of the sphere can be changed, and the sphere is projected. The collision (landing) on the portion 155 can be easily avoided (the frequency can be reduced).

Therefore, the contact between the ball and the ridge portion 155 can be easily limited to the contact between the ball that flows down (rolls) after landing on the lower plate portion 152, so that the ridge can collide with the ball. It is possible to prevent the portion 155 from being cracked or damaged, and it is possible to maintain the effect of decelerating the ball by the protruding portion 155 for a long period of time.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with the center frame 86 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, and the window portion 60a is provided in accordance with the size of the center frame 86. Although the openings are formed, the present embodiment is characterized by the shape of the window portion 60a with respect to the shape of the center frame 86. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the base plate 60. In FIG. 9, a line showing the shape of the center frame 86 in the state of being assembled to the base plate 60 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, the center frame 86 is a member formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is a flat plate-shaped flat plate portion 86a that is arranged to face the base plate 60 from the front side and has a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted. On the front side of the flat plate portion 86a at a substantially intermediate position between the boundary wall portion 86b that forms a boundary portion of the game area that projects to the front side of the flat plate portion 86a and the inner rail 61 and the lower left portion of the boundary wall portion 86b. Where it has a plate-like shape and is provided with an adjacent boundary wall portion 86b and a flow dividing plate portion 86c provided in parallel (see FIG. 5), in FIG. 9, the outer edge shape and the inner edge shape of the flat plate portion 86a and the boundary wall portion The shape of 86b and the shape of the flow distribution plate portion 86c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the range in which the boundary wall 86b constitutes the rolling surface (flowing surface) of the sphere (the range in which the normal line passing through the outer surface of the boundary wall faces upward), the window portion of the base plate 60 is formed. 60a is provided in a range that extends to the outside of the boundary wall portion 86b in a front view. Therefore, light can pass through the window portion 60a not only inside the boundary wall portion 86b (center side of the window portion 60a) but also outside the boundary wall portion 86b.

Thereby, the light passing through the window 60a can be applied to the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the boundary wall portion 86b, and the light emission effect of causing the sphere to shine can be executed. Here, the upper surface of the boundary wall portion 86b is a place where the player who plays the game while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is likely to become a blind spot, and the sphere is likely to be partially hidden. Although it tends to be a difficult place, the mode of light passing through the window 60a changes depending on whether or not there is a sphere, so the player can easily recognize whether or not there is a sphere by checking the mode of light. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the blind spots are used to improve the efficiency of the area where the effect is executed. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine 13 taken along the line corresponding to the line XX in FIG. In FIG. 10, an example of the arrangement of the eyes of the player when playing the game with the third symbol display device 81 viewed from the front is shown. With the arrangement of the eyes shown in FIG. 10, the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the line of sight YE2 in the front-rear direction, while the boundary wall portion 86b arranged on the upper part of the center frame 86 looks like looking up. The line of sight YE3 is visually recognized.

When viewing the game area with the line of sight YE3, at least a part of the field of view is shielded by the boundary wall 86b and the decorative portion arranged inside (lower side) of the boundary wall 86b, and the shielded range is shielded by the boundary wall 86b and the decorative portion. SE1 becomes hard to see (becomes a blind spot). In this embodiment, the base plate 60 is intentionally formed with an opening and a window 60a is provided at a position overlapping the shielded area SE1 in the front-rear direction. In other words, the shielded area SE1 is not treated as a place where a pattern or a graphic is drawn, thereby effectively utilizing the blind spot. This will be described below.

Conventionally, when the base plate 60 is made of a wooden member, a sticker on which a pattern or a graphic is drawn (printed) is mainly attached to a range on the back side of the game area, thereby creating individuality of each game machine. The decoration method was adopted.

In this case, since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize even if a pattern or a figure is drawn in a range such as a boundary wall 86b and a wall-like portion protruding toward the game area side such as a decorative portion, which is likely to be a blind spot, It is difficult to increase the effect.

There is also an option not to put a sticker in the range where this blind spot is likely to occur, thereby reducing the material area of the sticker by reducing the area of the sticker, but the line of sight of the player is not always fixed. Therefore, when the line of sight is changed and the exposed part of the base plate 60 (wooden plate member) is not affixed with the sticker, it gives the player the impression that it is cheap and the player's willingness to play is increased. May lead to decline. Therefore, it is difficult to say that the option of not sticking a decorative sticker in a range where blind spots are likely to occur is not preferable, and improvement has been desired.

In addition, when completing a pattern or figure in a range outside the blind spot, it is necessary to draw a pattern or figure in a game area whose size is already limited, in a narrower range. It was difficult to increase the degree of freedom.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the window portion 60a in the base plate 60 in a range that overlaps at least a part of the shielded range SE1, the shielded range SE1 is not a place to draw a figure or a pattern, It is used as a path for light. That is, according to the present embodiment, the transmitted light R2 that is emitted from the rendering means (for example, the pivotally supported means 760, see FIG. 37) arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 and proceeds to the front side is the shielded range. The flat plate portion 86a in SE1 can be configured to be transparent.

As a result, even if the option of not sticking the sticker on which the pattern or figure is drawn to the shielded area SE1 is selected, the player who visually recognizes the shielded area SE1 is illuminated by the transmitted light R2. Since it is possible to show the shining flat plate portion 86a, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player the impression of being cheesy, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

In addition, since the line of sight YE3 and the transmitted light R2 overlap, the player can visually recognize the transmitted light R2 and the pattern or figure drawn on the sticker attached to the base plate 60 in an overlapping manner. .. At least, the appearance of the game area visually recognized by the line of sight YE3 can be changed between the irradiation state of the transmitted light R2 and the non-irradiation state, so that the degree of freedom in decoration of the game area can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shielded area SE1 as a blind spot can be effectively used to increase the degree of freedom in decoration of the game board 13, and as a result, the effect of the game board 13 can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the boundary wall portion 86b includes a left boundary wall portion 86b1 extending from the upper end portion to the lower left side, and a right boundary wall portion 86b2 extending from the upper end portion to the lower right side, In each of the game areas, a visible light-transmitting area is formed in a linear shape, but has different widths.

That is, on the side of the right boundary wall portion 86b2, the distance between the outer rail 62 and the outer edge member 73 is narrow, and the path of the sphere is substantially constant, so that the width through which light is transmitted is narrow (about 5 [mm] or less). .. On the other hand, on the left boundary wall portion 86b1 side, the landing position of the ball varies depending on the firing intensity, and the bounce after landing depends on whether or not the ball collides with a nail (not shown) before landing. Because it changes, it is difficult for the path of the sphere to be constant (variation occurs). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width through which light passes is configured to be wide (a maximum of approximately 12 [mm]) for the purpose of coping with variations in the downward flow path of the sphere.

In particular, around the flow dividing plate portion 86c, the window portion 60a is provided in such a manner that the window portion 60a is widened to a position where it overlaps with both left and right ranges of the flow dividing plate portion 86c, and the width for transmitting light is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere (about 11[ mm] or more). As a result, the transmitted light R2 can be applied to the sphere that flows down on either the left or right of the flow distribution plate portion 86c.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the shape of the window portion 60a is designed so that the transmitted light R2 is easily applied to the sphere rolling on the boundary wall portion 86b, so that it is efficient for the sphere flowing down the game area. The transmitted light R2 can be applied to. Therefore, even when the sphere flows down a portion that is easily blocked by the boundary wall portion 86b and becomes a blind spot, the appearance of the transmitted light R2 can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the sphere. It can be easily grasped by the player.

An example of the irradiation mode of the transmitted light R2 will be described. For example, light is emitted to the left boundary wall portion 86b1 side when informing the player to play left, and light is emitted to the right boundary wall portion 86b2 side when informing the player to play right. It may be controlled to irradiate. In this case, the player can easily understand, by looking at the boundary wall portion 86b, whether to shoot the ball by left-handing or right-handing.

Further, the irradiation mode of the transmitted light R2 is not limited at all. For example, it may be an irradiation mode in which lighting is continued, or an irradiation mode in which lighting and extinction are repeated (blinking).

Further, the irradiation mode in which the periphery of the flow dividing plate portion 86c is illuminated is not limited at all. For example, an irradiation mode in which the left and right sides of the flow distribution plate portion 86c are illuminated may be used, or an irradiation mode in which either one of the left and right sides of the flow distribution plate portion 86c may be illuminated.

For example, when the game area is configured such that most of the case where the ball flows to the left of the flow dividing plate portion 86c is limited to when the firing intensity of the ball becomes weaker than a specific reference, only the left side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c. In the control mode of irradiating the transmitted light R2 so as to illuminate, the player easily confirms whether or not the emission intensity of the sphere is weaker than a specific reference by confirming the brightness of the transmitted light R2. can do.

That is, when the sphere passes the left side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c, the transmitted light R2 is blocked by the sphere, and the left side of the flow dividing plate portion 86c is visually recognized as dark. Therefore, the brightness of the transmitted light R2 and the emission intensity of the sphere. Can be associated with weaker than certain criteria. As a result, the stress felt by the player when adjusting (maintaining) the emission intensity of the ball can be reduced compared to the case where the emission intensity of the ball is grasped by confirming the landing position of the ball.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by configuring the blind spot, which is shielded by the boundary wall portion 86b and the flow distribution plate portion 86c, as the path of the transmitted light R2 traveling from the rear surface side to the front surface side, The degree of freedom of light production in the game area can be improved. The range in which the blind spot is formed is not limited to the upper part of the boundary wall part 86b or the left part of the flow dividing plate part 86c, and various modes are exemplified.

For example, it may be a range below a pair of plate-shaped portions extending toward the lower left and right sides of the first winning opening 64, or a range outside the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (opposite to the game area). The area may be below the upper plate portion 151 (see FIG. 5) of the left effect unit 150, or of the ball guide member 154 (see FIG. 5) that guides the ball to the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. It may be in the lower range, may be in the lower range of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the lower right side of the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the right side of the game area, or outside the center frame 86 ( It may be the range of the side opposite to the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front) or the peripheral range of other plate-like portions that project toward the front side of the base plate 60.

It returns to FIG. 5 and demonstrates. The right effect unit 160 is a unit including the variable winning device 65, and is fitted into the small window portion 60b of the base plate 60 from the front side. The ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) of the variable winning device 65 flows down the downflow path FL1 (see FIG. 11) formed on the back side of the right effect unit 160, and a ball discharging path (not shown). Will be guided to.

FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right effect unit 160. The right performance unit 160 has a base member 161 that has an opening portion that is opened toward the back surface side and that constitutes the front side portion of the downflow path FL1, and a first flow path member 162 that constitutes the back surface side portion of the downflow path FL1. And a second flow path member 163, an adjusting member 165 arranged on the front side of the second flow path member 163 and configured to be engageable with the second flow path member 163, an LED that emits light toward the front side, and the like. And a plurality of electric decoration substrates 168 on which the light emitting means of FIG.

The game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a and entered the downflow path FL1 flows down the front side of the first flow path member 162, and then flows down the front side of the second flow path member 163. That is, the first flow path member 162 constitutes the downflow path FL1 on the upstream side of the second flow path member 163.

The decorative board 168 includes a first decorative board 168a arranged on the back side of the opening/closing plate of the variable winning device 65, a second decorative board 168b arranged on the rear side outside the spherical flow path, and a second decorative board 168b. The third flow path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the back surface side, and the third lighting board 168c is disposed on the back surface side of the downflow path FL1.

Note that, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of each LED (light emitting means) is shown inside the illuminated substrate 168 by a hidden line. As shown in FIG. 11, the LEDs are not arranged such that the density is different depending on the location, but are arranged substantially uniformly on the decorative substrate 168.

By the first illumination board 168a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect of illuminating an opening/closing plate of the variable winning device 65 and an opening portion through which a game ball can enter when the opening/closing plate is open. With the second electric circuit board 168b, it is possible to execute a light emission effect of illuminating the front design portion of the right effect unit 160, regardless of the game ball flowing down into the right effect unit 160.

With the third illumination board 168c, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the way of lighting changes in association with the game ball flowing down the downflow path FL1. That is, when the game sphere is arranged in the second flow path member 163, the player can visually recognize the shadow generated by the light emitted from the third illumination substrate 168c being blocked by the game sphere. On the other hand, when the game sphere is not arranged in the second flow path member 163, the shadow of the game sphere can be made invisible.

The light emitted from the third illumination board 168c passes through the second flow path member 163, the adjusting member 165, and the base member 161 in this order, passes through to the front side of the right performance unit 160, and is visually recognized by the player. As the number of passing members increases, the amount of visible light is likely to be attenuated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the adjusting member 165 is arranged on the front side of the lower end portion of the second flow path member 163 (the end portion of the flow-down path FL1 that is visible to the player). The location where the amount of light is likely to be attenuated can be limited to the vicinity of the end portion of the downflow path FL1. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitted from the third illumination board 168c, as compared with the case where the light amount is attenuated at an intermediate position of the downflow path FL1.

Furthermore, while the sphere passing through the downflow route FL1 can be visually recognized even from the front, the player usually looks down at the right performance unit 160 arranged in the lower right part of the game area. Therefore, a straight line connecting the player's line of sight and the third decorative board 168c (a straight line that inclines obliquely downward as the player approaches the pachinko machine 10) connects the adjusting member 165 and the third decorative board 168c. The possibility of crossing a line segment (a straight line passing through a part of the adjusting member 165 and extending in the front-rear direction) is low.

This is an effect obtained by arranging the adjusting member 165 at a position away from the player's eyes (near the lower end position of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 2)), but the adjusting member 165 attenuates the light amount. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will pay attention to the range. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light visually recognized by the player due to the light emitted from the third illumination substrate 168c from being lowered by the adjusting member 165.

12 is an exploded rear view of the right rendering unit 160, FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rendering unit 160, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rendering unit 160. Note that, in FIG. 12, the first flow path member 162 is assembled to the base member 161, and the second flow path member 163 and the adjusting member 165 are disassembled for easy understanding.

The base member 161 has a semi-formed portion 161a that is open toward the back side and forms the front side surface of the downflow path FL1, and a female screw formed in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the back side and having a first passage. A pair of columnar fastening portions 161b into which fastening screws inserted into the member 162 are screwed, and a projecting length longer than that of the columnar fastening portions 161b, and a female body formed in a cylindrical shape projecting to the back side and formed at the tip. A specific columnar fastening portion 161c into which a fastening screw that is inserted into the second flow path member 163 is screwed into the screw, and a plurality of thin plate-shaped projections radially outward are provided on the base end side of the specific columnar fastening portion 161c. The ridge portion 161d and a recessed portion 161e that is recessed from the back surface side to the front surface side of the base member 161 in a range including the specific columnar fastening portion 161c are provided.

The plurality of ridge portions 161d are formed at angular positions corresponding to the cutout portions 165e and the outer diameter recessed portion 165g of the adjusting member 165, and the cutout portions 165e are aligned with the ridge portions 161d to adjust the adjustment member. The posture can be easily adjusted when the 165 is assembled.

The recessed portion 161e is recessed in a shape corresponding to the plate-shaped portion 165a of the adjustment member 165 (a shape larger by the adjustment width), and functions as a recess for disposing the plate-shaped portion 165a. In the assembled state in which the plate-shaped portion 165a is arranged in the recessed portion 161e (see FIG. 11), the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 165a is arranged on the surface on which the back surface of the base member 161 is arranged (in other words, , The rear surface of the base member 161 and the rear surface of the plate-shaped portion 165a are arranged flush with each other.

That is, the adjustment member 165 is a member arranged on the front side of the downflow path FL1, but the difference in the arrangement within the recessed portion 161e does not affect the shape of the downflow path FL1. Therefore, as will be described later, even when the position of the adjusting member 165 is adjusted with an adjustment width between the adjusting member 165 and the recessed portion 161e, it is possible to prevent the shape of the downflow path FL1 from changing due to the position adjustment. ..

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the adjusting member 165, if the base member 161, the first flow path member 162, and the second flow path member 163 are assembled in an arrangement suitable for causing the sphere to flow down, the sphere will flow down. It is configured to be able to flow down. Therefore, as compared with the case where a part of the flow path shape (for example, a half pipe shape) as seen in the half-forming portions 161a, 162a, 163a is also formed in the adjusting member 165, the assembly of the right rendering unit 160 is performed. The difficulty level can be lowered.

The first flow path member 162 is provided with a half-forming portion 162a that is open toward the front side and forms the back side surface of the downflow path FL1 and a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 161b. A pair of insertion holes 162b, and a columnar fastening portion 162c into which a fastening screw inserted into the second flow path member 163 is screwed into a female screw formed in a cylindrical shape on the back side and formed at the tip.

The second flow path member 163 is provided with a half-forming portion 163a that is opened toward the front side and forms the back side surface of the downflow path FL1 and a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 162b. Through hole 163b, through hole 163c through which a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to specific columnar fastening portion 161c can be inserted, and a semi-cylindrical cylindrical projection from the front end of half-forming portion 163a to the front side. And a plurality of fitting protrusions 163d.

The adjustment member 165 is a member formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the recessed portion 161e and is formed in a plate shape having a thickness equivalent to the recessed depth of the recessed portion 161e. A plate-like portion 165a, a plurality of fitting holes 165b formed in the plate-like portion 165a at a position corresponding to the fitting convex portion 163d and having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the fitting convex portion 163d, and the plate-like portion A chamfered portion 165c that is chamfered at a corner where the upper surface and the back surface of 165a intersect, a plate portion 165d that is formed on a deep plate whose front side is open at the right end of the plate-shaped portion 165a, and the plate portion 165d. Notch portion 165e formed by notching from the edge portion of the dish toward the dish bottom side, and a notch portion 165e formed in the center of the bottom of the dish portion 165d in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the diameter of the specific columnar fastening portion 161c. The adjusting hole 165f is provided, and a plurality of outer diameter recessed portions 165g recessed in the adjusting hole 165f toward the outer diameter direction of the adjusting hole 165f.

The fitting hole 165b is configured to be fittable with the fitting protrusion 163d of the second flow path member 163 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and by this fitting, the rigidity of the second flow path member 163 is increased. Can be strengthened.

More specifically, the second flow path member 163 is not only viewed from the viewpoint of material cost, but also the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged in front of the third illuminated substrate 168c is visually recognized by the player. In order to facilitate the process (to suppress the attenuation of light), it is desirable that the film is thin.

On the other hand, when the second flow path member 163 is formed to be thin, there is a possibility that the second flow path member 163 may be deformed toward the outside of the flow path due to the load applied from the flowing down game sphere without any countermeasure. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by fitting the fitting convex portion 163d of the second flow path member 163 into the fitting hole 165b, it is possible to generate a resistance force against the load outward of the flow path. .. Thereby, the deformation of the second flow path member 163 can be prevented.

The chamfered portion 165c is a processing portion for preventing a corner from colliding with a sphere flowing down the downflow path FL1. Therefore, it is sufficient if it is formed only at the minimum position (for example, the range between the pair of fitting holes 165b) that is arranged so as to face the sphere flowing down the flow-down path FL1. Processing costs can be reduced.

Since the chamfered portion 165c is formed at the corner portion arranged to face the sphere flowing down the flow-down path FL1, even when the adjustment member 165 protrudes from the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 to the back side due to a dimensional error or the like. The point where the ball and the adjusting member 165 collide can be formed by a surface. As a result, the possibility that the adjusting member 165 is damaged can be reduced, and the downflow resistance of the sphere can be reduced.

The plate portion 165d projects more toward the back side than the plate-shaped portion 165a, and thus is easy to grip, and functions as a handle when the adjusting member 165 is removed during assembly or maintenance. At the time of assembling, the notch 165e is tapered so that the notch 165e is easily guided by the protrusion 161d, so that the attitude of the adjusting member 165 can be easily adjusted. Therefore, the assembling work for inserting the specific columnar fastening portion 161c into the adjustment hole 165f can be easily performed.

When the specific columnar fastening portion 161c is inserted into the adjustment hole 165f, the posture of the adjustment member 165 is changed (adjustment) with the gap size between the cutout portion 165e and the outer diameter recessed portion 165g and the protrusion 161d as the upper limit. )can do. The mode of adjustment will be described later.

Here, the purpose of configuring the adjusting member 165 as a variable member will be described. In the present embodiment, both the first flow path member 162 on the upstream side and the second flow path member 163 on the downstream side use the shape of the back surface of the base member 161 to form the shape of the front surface of the downflow path FL1. The number of members forming the flow-down path FL1 is reduced as compared with the case where other members forming the front side shape of the flow-down path FL1 are individually prepared for the first flow path member 162 and the second flow path member 163, respectively. can do. Thereby, the material cost can be reduced.

On the other hand, in resin molding, since the dimensions vary, it is not possible to form the flow path members having exactly the same shape. Depending on how the dimensions of the flow path member vary, the sphere may not pass through the downflow path FL1. Therefore, in the actual assembling process, it is confirmed that the sphere passes through the downflow path FL1 when the first flow path member 162 is fastened and fixed to the base member 161, and the first flow path member 162 is placed at a position where the sphere can pass. And then the second flow-down path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the columnar fastening portion 162c of the first flow channel member 162 and the specific columnar fastening portion 161c of the base member 161.

In this way, it is preferable to provide a certain range of adjustment width at the fixing position of the first flow path member 162 with respect to the base member 161. In the present embodiment, the difference between the inner diameter of the insertion hole 162b and the outer diameter of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 162b can be used as the adjustment width. Note that, regardless of the adjustment width, the second flow path member 163 is directly fastened and fixed to the first flow path member 162 in the vicinity of the connection position of the flow path FL1. Can be easily secured.

In this case, the second channel member 163 is also affected by the adjustment width of the first channel member 162. Here, as described above, the rigidity of the second flow path member 163 can be improved not only by disposing the second flow path member 163 so as to face the back surface of the base member 161, but also by fitting them. However, when the fitting part is fixedly arranged on the base member 161, the fitting part on the base member 161 side and the fitting part on the second flow path member 163 side are affected by the adjustment width of the first flow path member 162. There is a possibility that the positions of and shift and the assembly failure occurs.

In consideration of this positional deviation, the fitting portion on the base member 161 side and the fitting portion on the second flow path member 163 side may be fitted with a clearance fit, but the larger the clearance, the larger the second flow path. The effect of strengthening the rigidity of the member 163 is reduced, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fitting portion on the side of the base member 161 is provided in the adjusting member 165, and the arrangement of the adjusting member 165 can be adjusted with an adjusting width exceeding the adjusting width of the first flow path member 162. Thus, it is possible to cancel the positional deviation of the fitting portion caused by the position adjustment of the first flow path member 162, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure.

In this case, it is not necessary to secure a sufficient gap between the fitting hole 165b of the adjusting member 165 and the fitting convex portion 163d of the second flow path member 163. The rigidity of the two-passage member 163 can be sufficiently enhanced.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the difference between the size of the base member 161 and the size of the adjustment member 165 is used as the adjustment width. For example, the width wa1 of the ridge portion 161d of the base member 161 is configured to be shorter than the width wa2 of the outer diameter recessed portion 165g of the adjustment member 165, so that the adjustment width can be secured (wa1< wa2).

Further, for example, the width wb1 of the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 is configured to be longer than the width wb2 of the plate-shaped portion 165a of the adjustment member 165, so that the adjustment width can be secured (wb1> wb2).

In addition, the adjusting member 165 is supported by the specific columnar fastening portion 161c so that the adjusting hole 165f cannot be removed and the fitting convex portion 163b is inserted into the fitting hole 165b when the second flow path member 163 is fastened and fixed. The back surface of the shaped portion 165a is supported so as to be capable of contacting the front side end portion of the half-forming portion 163a of the second flow path member 163, and thus is fixed between the base member 161 and the second flow path member 163. ..

Therefore, a dedicated fastener for fastening and fixing the adjusting member 165 can be eliminated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the number of assembling steps can be reduced by reducing the fastener.

It returns to FIG. 5 and demonstrates. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. The operation unit 300 will be described below.

15 and 16 are front views of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300. 15 and 17, the movable members (movable accessory) of the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are shown in the standby position, and in FIG. 16, the first operating unit. The state where each movable member (each movable accessory) of 400 and the second operation unit 700 is arranged at the projecting position projecting forward of the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in the operation unit 300, the movable accessory that vertically displaces the front side of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged vertically, and the movable unit is arranged vertically. The accessories have different shapes and operation modes from each other.

The movable accessory placed vertically is configured to be independently drivable, and both are placed in the projecting position so that most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is hidden. In other words, when either the movable accessory placed on the upper side or the movable accessory placed on the lower side is placed in the projecting position, the other range of the third symbol display device 81 is movable. It is not hidden by a role object, and in addition to being able to perform a liquid crystal effect using this range, it is possible to perform an effect that combines the liquid crystal effect and a movable accessory that is arranged in the extended position. You can

Further, as will be described later in detail, the movable accessory placed on the lower side is configured such that a plurality (four in this embodiment) of movable accessory are arranged in the left-right direction, and each of them is vertically movable independently. Therefore, in addition to the state in which all the movable accessories are arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 16), only a part (for example, the left end) of the movable accessory is arranged in the projecting position or the projecting position. It is possible to configure a state in which the movable accessory is arranged at different vertical heights between the position and the standby position.

FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a rear case 310 formed in a box shape, the front side of which is open from an outer wall portion 312 which is provided upright from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit 300 is provided in the inner space of the rear case 310, the first operation unit 400 in which the movable accessory is displaceable along a path including the lower side of the opening 311a, and the left and right sides of the opening 311a. A left-right effect unit 600 that performs a light-emission effect and the like, and a second operation unit 700 in which the movable accessory is disposed so as to be displaceable along a path including the upper side of the opening 311a are housed, and are configured as one unit. ..

Specifically, the first operation unit 400 is disposed on the bottom wall 311 of the rear case 310 at a position below the opening 311a, and the second operation unit 700 is disposed at a position above the opening 311a. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are disassembled from the rear case 310.

The left-right effect unit 600 includes an electric circuit board having a light emitting unit such as an LED inside, and the electric circuit board is arranged obliquely so that the optical axis of the light emitting unit moves to the left and right inward as it approaches the player side. It is characterized by being inclined to. As a result, the optical axes of the light emitting means intersect on the front side for the player, so that the light emitted from the left and right effect units 600 can be viewed three-dimensionally.

The rear case 310 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the end portion on the front side of the outer wall portion 312, and the game board 13 is faced in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). The support plate part 313 which supports is provided.

The support plate portion 313 has a positioning projection 313a protruding toward the front side in a shape capable of fitting with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 313b formed so that the fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted therethrough.

By positioning the rear case 310 with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 313a into the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b, and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

It should be noted that the shape of the positioning protrusion 313a is not limited at all, and various modes are illustrated. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the positioning convex portion 313a also has a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 18, in the present embodiment, a large number of support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310, and the formation of the support plate portions 313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. However, this is the result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of a plywood board in which veneer boards are overlapped as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. Is invisible, so that the entire rear surface of the area where the opening can be formed (or recessed from the side surface) in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is effective as an area for production in which the movable member is visibly arranged. ..

On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in a front view, so that the movable member is correspondingly removed. The area that can be arranged is narrowed. Therefore, if the support plate portion 313 can be omitted and the strength problem can be maintained, the restriction of the movable member disposition range can be avoided by omitting the support plate portion 313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the large number of support plate portions 313 arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the ball shot in the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed in a place other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball prevention member 68. It is introduced into the area (see FIG. 2), and thereafter it is configured to flow down the game area. In the ball game, the place that is considered to receive the most attention is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer region (for example, the region on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 interposed therebetween). It is usual that the attention to () is low.

Therefore, a lower left portion and an upper left portion based on a left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and an upper left portion and an upper right portion based on the upward convex arc are provided as ranges that the sphere cannot reach. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left portions with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and are arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, and the game board 13 is made of a plywood plate that hardly transmits light in the first place, and the outer edge member 73 is provided from the front side of the game board 13. Since the back side of the game board 13 cannot be viewed through the or block-shaped member 74, it is considered that the player's attention will be further reduced.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged at a location where the attention is reduced or a location where the attention is not visible. Actually, even in the left side portion and the upper side portion where the support plate portion 313 is formed in large numbers, the support plate portion 313 is formed near the corner portion of the rear case 310, avoiding the central portion as the protruding end portion of the outer rail 62. To be done.

In other words, by selecting a location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from a location with low visibility (low performance), the rigidity of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole is reduced. It is possible to secure a high degree of freedom in designing a region within the field of view of a player who pays attention to the ball, while achieving the effect of securing it.

In this respect, since there is a common configuration in the pachinko machine that rolls the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) along the outer rail 62 and introduces it into the game area, the range where the ball does not flow down Can be easily arranged in the lower left part, the upper left part and the upper right part.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 extending from the lower outer wall portion 312 is disposed on the back side with respect to the support plate portion 313 extending from the left and right outer wall portions 312. .. With this configuration, the positioning protrusions 313a formed on the left and right support plate portions 313 are fitted into the fitting recesses formed on the back surface of the base plate 60, while the positioning protrusions 313a are formed on the lower support plate portion 313. The formed positioning protrusion 313a is not directly fitted to the base plate 60, but is formed with a shape corresponding to the ball flow-down unit (not shown) arranged on the back side of the base plate 60. It is fitted into the shape part. That is, the positioning protrusion 313a arranged below the rear case 310 is indirectly fixed to the base plate 60 via the ball flow-down unit.

19 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. The first operation unit 400 includes a base member 401 that is fitted into the rear case 310 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and four complex operation units 402 having substantially the same configuration are provided on the front side of the base member 401. It is fastened and fixed in a position aligned with.

The composite operation unit 402 includes a rotating unit 500 formed in a substantially dice shape and configured to be rotatable about a horizontal axis, and a mechanism for vertically moving the rotating unit 500. The details of the combined operation unit 402 will be described below.

21A and 21B are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 402, and FIGS. 22A and 22B are rear perspective views of the combined operation unit 402. 21(a) and 22(a) show a state in which the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, and in FIGS. 21(b) and 22(b), the rotary unit 500 is in the lowered position. The arranged state is shown.

In the combined operation unit 402, the columnar member 431 guides the rotary unit 500 in the vertical direction, and the drive motor 441 generates a driving force for vertically moving the rotary unit 500. The electric wiring DK1 guided inside the rotating unit 500 is composed of a bundle of a plurality of electric wires, and hangs down to the wiring assisting means 460 while passing through the opposite side of the side where the columnar member 431 is arranged. It is configured to be accessible. Hereinafter, each configuration of the composite operation unit 402 will be described.

23 and 24 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 402. 23 and 24, a state in which disassembly of the rotation unit 500 is omitted is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the composite operation unit 402 includes a support unit 410 that supports the rotation unit 500, a stacking unit 420 that is stacked and fixed on the support unit 410, and a moving direction of the stacking unit 420. Guide means 430 for guiding the movement of the support means 410 by limiting to one direction (in the present embodiment, the vertical direction), a drive means 440 having a drive motor 441 for generating a drive force for moving the support means 410, A split base member 442 that supports the drive motor 441, a transmission unit 450 that is meshed with the drive gear 441a of the drive motor 441 and that is capable of transmitting the drive force, and a length that can correspond to the amount of movement of the support unit 410. Mainly provided is a wiring assisting means 460 configured to be able to arrange (accommodate) the electric wiring DK1 without being entangled or pinched.

The support means 410 is vertically opened to a flat plate portion 411 formed in a flat plate shape, an annular projection 412 projecting from the upper surface of the flat plate portion 411 in an annular shape, and a central portion of the annular projection 412. A deformed hole 413 formed as a through hole, a front hanging portion 414 bent downward from a front edge portion of the flat plate portion 411, and a plate-like portion continuously provided at the left end of the front hanging portion 414. A left surface hanging portion 415 bent downward from the left edge portion of the flat plate portion 411, and a connecting member 454 of the transmission means 450 formed as a long hole extending in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the left surface hanging portion 415 are inserted. And a connecting plate portion 416 having a penetrating elongated hole 416a.

The laminating means 420 is housed in an end plate member 421 configured as a plate member having a substantially front-rear symmetry, a recessed portion 422 recessed and formed in front and rear end portions of the end plate member 421, and the recessed portion 422. A guide tubular portion 423 configured in a cylindrical shape having a possible size and a right cylindrical portion 423 disposed between the end plate member 421 and the support means 410 and fastened and fixed to the end plate member 421 to cover the recessed portion 422 from the right side. A lid member 424 is mainly provided.

The guide tubular portion 423 is housed only in the recessed portion 422 at the front end of the recessed portions 422 recessed at the front and rear ends of the end plate member 421, and the recessed portion at the rear end is formed. It is not arranged in 422 (the arrangement is omitted).

As a result, similarly to the case where both the front and rear recessed portions 422 are provided with the guide tubular portion 423, the rear side supported by the transmission means 450 when the rotary unit 500 is placed in the lowered position or the raised position. Since the posture deviation occurring at the front end farthest from the end (see FIG. 34C) can be minimized, the arrangement of the rotary unit 500 can be stabilized.

Further, as compared with the case where the guide tubular portion 423 is provided on both the front and rear recessed portions 422, the gap between the recessed portion 422 and the columnar member 431 at the rear end supported by the transmission means 450. Therefore, the resistance generated when the laminating means 420 moves up and down can be reduced.

The right lid member 424 is inserted through the pair of insertion holes 424 a into which the fastening screws fastened and fixed to the end plate member 421 are inserted, and the right cover member 424 is inserted from the end plate member 421 side, and the left surface of the supporting means 410 is hung. A plurality of insertion openings 424b formed so that fastening screws fastened and fixed to the portion 415 can be inserted therethrough, and the guide tubular portion 423 of the laminating means 420 is formed in a shape that cannot be removed in the vertical direction, and is recessed to be receivable. And a recessed support portion 424c that is provided.

The guide means 430 is composed of a metal columnar member 431 arranged in a front and rear pair so as to pass through at least one of the guide cylindrical portion 423 and the recessed portion 422, and a metal plate arranged on the left surface of the columnar member 431. Metal plate portion 432, an upper bent portion 433 bent rightward from an upper portion of the metal plate portion 432, and a lower bent portion rightwardly formed from a lower portion of the metal plate portion 432. It mainly includes a side bent portion 434 and a rear bent portion 435 that is bent and formed rightward from the rear side portion of the metal plate portion 432.

The metal plate portion 432 is notched downward from the upper portion and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the left side. Thereby, the assembling worker or the maintenance worker can reach the front-rear intermediate portion (the portion between the pair of front and rear recessed portions 422) of the end plate member 421 through the notched area, so that the assembling work or the maintenance work can be performed. The efficiency of the work can be improved, but details will be described later.

The metal plate portion 432 is arranged close to the end plate member 421 in the left-right direction except the central portion in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, even if the end plate member 421 may be displaced in the left-right direction, the displacement can be regulated not only by the contact with the columnar member 431 but also by the contact with the metal plate portion 432. ..

Accordingly, the lateral displacement of the laminating means 420 can be suppressed, so that the lateral displacement of the supporting means 410 fastened and fixed to the laminating means 420 and the transmitting means 450 connected to the supporting means 410 can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

The upper bent portion 433 and the lower bent portion 434 are through holes formed at positions where they overlap each other when viewed in the vertical direction, and the support holes 433a are formed in a size that allows the columnar member 431 to be inserted and supported. 434a.

In the assembled state, the columnar member 431 is inserted into the support holes 433a and 434a, and the end portion is formed to have a length that slightly projects from the upper side of the upper bent portion 433 and the lower side of the lower bent portion 434 ( 21(a)). The columnar member 431 is prevented from coming off the support holes 433a, 434a by fitting a so-called "E-ring" into a groove formed in the slightly overhanging portion from the outer diameter direction.

The lower bent portion 434 stably supports the split base member 442 while supporting the split base member 442. In this supported state, the back side plate portion of the split base member 442 overlaps the rear bent portion 435 in the front-rear direction, and the back surface is passed through the base member 401 (see FIG. 20) arranged on the back side of the split base member 442. The base member 401, the divided base member 442, and the guide means 430 can be integrally fixed by fastening and fixing the fastening screw inserted from the side to the female screw portion formed in the rear side bent portion 435. ..

The drive means 440 is configured such that the partition plate portion 442a of the divided base member 442 arranges the constituent elements into right and left parts according to their functions. That is, on the left side of the partition plate portion 442a, a configuration (transmission means 450, etc.) for transmitting the driving force is arranged, and on the right side of the partition plate portion 442a, a configuration for supplying power or power is supplied. The configuration (the main body of the drive motor 441, the wiring assisting means 460 in which the electric wiring DK1 is housed, etc.) is arranged. Although the electrical wiring DK1 used for power supply is not shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the relationship between the electrical wiring DK1 and the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the displacement will be described in detail later.

The drive motor 441 is attached to the partition plate portion 442a from the right side, and the drive gear 441a extends to the left side of the partition plate portion 442a through an opening formed in the partition plate portion 442a. When the drive motor 441 is driven and the drive gear 441a rotates in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the driving force is transmitted to the transmission means 450 via the transmission gear 451 that meshes with the drive gear 441a.

The partition plate portion 442a has a plurality of projecting portions 442b projecting from the left surface to the left in a columnar shape, and an axis fixed above the projecting portion 442b at the upper end and parallel to the projecting direction of the projecting portion 442b. A cylindrical metal cylindrical portion 442c formed in a cylindrical shape, a photocoupler type detection sensor 442d that is fastened and fixed in a posture in which the detection groove is arranged to face the metallic cylindrical portion 442c, and an opening formed in the left-right direction Mainly includes a portion 442e.

Each of the projecting portions 442b is configured to be capable of pivotally supporting the transmission gear 451 and the intermediate gear 452, has a female screw formed at the projecting tip, and a fastening screw with a brim is fastened and fixed to the female screw. The transmission gear 451 and the intermediate gear 452 can be axially supported so as not to fall off. The metal columnar portion 442c is formed with a diameter capable of supporting the rotation arm member 453.

The detection sensor 442d is configured to be able to detect that the detected plate portion 453d of the rotating arm member 453 is arranged in the detection groove. Thereby, the position of the rotating arm member 453 can be detected.

The opening 442e is an opening for passing the electric wiring DK1 that has reached between the split base member 442 and the wiring auxiliary means 460 in the left-right direction and guiding the electric wiring DK1 to the back side, which will be described in detail later.

The transmission means 450 includes a transmission gear 451 which meshes with the drive gear 441 a, an intermediate gear 452 which is arranged above the transmission gear 451 (opposite to the drive gear 441 a) and meshes with the transmission gear 451, and an intermediate gear 452 thereof. A rotation arm member 453 having a gear portion 453a that meshes with the rotation arm member 453, and a connecting member 454 that is supported so as not to fall off at the rotation tip of the rotation arm member 453 are mainly provided.

The rotating arm member 453 is a member that is rotatably supported by the metal columnar portion 442c of the partition plate portion 442a, and has a gear portion 453a formed in a gear tooth shape along an arc centered on the rotation axis, An opening is formed in a direction parallel to the rotation axis at an extension arm portion 453b extending radially outward at a position axially displaced from the gear portion 453a and an extension tip end portion of the extension arm portion 453b. The support hole 453c and the detected plate portion 453d extending from the extending arm portion 453b along the rotation direction.

The connecting member 454 has a brass columnar supported portion 454a whose tip side is inserted into the through-hole 416a, and a flange portion 454c which is fitted to the base end side of the 454a and projects like a flange at the base end side end portion. It mainly includes a fitting lid 454b made of synthetic resin.

A well-known E ring (not shown) is fitted to the tip of the supported portion 454a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from falling off the penetrating elongated hole 416a to the left. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from falling off in the state before the stacking unit 420 and the guiding unit 430 are assembled to the split base member 442 (the state in the middle of assembly) and the connecting member 454 being lost.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 22A), the right cover member 424 is arranged to face the left side of the connecting member 454 (they are arranged so as to overlap in the left-right direction), so that the connecting member 454 is moved to the left side. Dropouts are physically regulated.

The outer diameter of the fitting lid portion 454b is formed to be shorter than the vertical width of the through long hole 416a, and the outer diameter of the flange portion 454c is formed to be longer than the vertical width of the long through hole 416a. Accordingly, by disposing the resin fitting lid portion 454b between the through slot 416a and the supported portion 454a made of metal, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the through slot 416a. Since the portion 454c has a size that cannot pass through the through long hole 416a, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 454 from dropping from the through long hole 416a to the right.

The wiring assisting means 460 is configured in a bottomed container shape from two members that are arranged so as to correspond to each other in the left-right direction. That is, the wiring assisting means 460 includes a left side member 461 which is arranged to face the right side of the partition plate 442a and is fastened and fixed to the partition plate 442a, and an internal shape of the left side member 461 which is arranged to face the right side of the left member 461. And a right side member 468 that is fastened and fixed to the left side member 461.

The left-side member 461 is fastened and fixed to a portion of the partition plate portion 442a that is formed to be raised to the right at the front-rear position, and the plate-shaped opposed plate 462 arranged to face each other, and the front and rear edges and the lower edge portion of the opposed plate 462. A strip-shaped extending portion 463 extending in a strip shape from the right to the right, and a supporting column portion 464 having a columnar projecting rightward near the upper end of the facing plate 462 and having a female screw formed at the projecting tip. A wiring support portion 465 having a shape in which a small-diameter member such as a binding band for supporting the electric wiring DK1 can be inserted is provided on the diagonally upper rear side of the support pillar portion 464.

Since the facing plate 462 is fastened and fixed to the raised portion of the partition plate portion 442a as described above, the facing plate 462 and the partition plate 462 are located at the front-rear intermediate position (a position other than the raised portion) of the partition plate portion 442a. A space is formed between the portion 442a and the portion 442a. This void functions as a void through which the electric wiring DK1 passes.

The electric wiring DK1 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) will be described later in detail, but passes through the opening 442e, the space between the partition plate 442a and the wiring assisting means 460, and the wiring support 465. Then, it passes from the rear side of the support pillar portion 464 to the lower side, the front side of the support pillar portion 464 is directed upward, and is supported by the support means 410 and the rotation unit 500.

Therefore, the electric wiring DK1 needs to have a length (extra length) that can correspond to the vertical movement of the supporting means 410 and the rotation unit 500, and the electric wiring DK1 having the extra length is necessary for the supporting means 410 and the rotation unit 500. Is placed in the lowered position, it is accommodated in the wiring assisting means 460 in a state in which it is loosely wound around the support column portion 464.

Here, in the present embodiment, the shape of the wiring assisting means 460 is designed so that the load applied to the electric wiring DK1 loosely wound around the support column portion 464 is small. That is, when the electric wiring DK1 is wound around the support pillar portion 464, the longer the length of the electric wiring DK1 to be wound is, the larger the maximum diameter of the electric wiring DK1 around the support pillar portion 464 becomes, so that the strip-shaped extending portion 463 is formed. If the distance between the electric wire DK1 and the electric wire DK1 is short, a load as a reaction force may be generated from the strip-shaped extending portion 463 to the electric wire DK1, but in the present embodiment, it is sufficient in the radial direction of the support column portion 464. The strip-shaped extending portions 463 are arranged at regular intervals.

In particular, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the rotation unit 500, the lower extending portion 519 as a portion that supports the electric wiring DK1 at a position close to the wiring assisting means 460 is arranged on the front side of the support pillar portion 464. To be done. Therefore, the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 that is left over as the supporting unit 410 and the rotation unit 500 move to the lowered position is arranged mainly on the front side of the supporting column portion 464.

Correspondingly, the strip-shaped extending portion 463 is designed so that a larger internal space can be secured on the front side of the support pillar portion 464 with the support pillar portion 464 as a reference in the front-rear direction. In addition, the strip-shaped extending portion 463 has a functional curved surface 463a, which is a surface that is displaced downward toward the front side below the support column portion 464 and that is a curved surface on which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged. Prepare

Due to its shape, the functional curved surface 463a can apply a load in the diagonally upper front direction as a reaction force to the electric wiring DK1 arranged in proximity. As a result, the electrical wiring DK1 can be easily gathered in the range on the front side with respect to the support column portion 464.

In addition, since the functional curved surface 463a has a curved shape projecting inward of the wiring assisting means 460, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing the drive motor 441. That is, the curved shape of the functional curved surface 463a can stabilize the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1, and can also arrange the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the drive motor 441 in a minimum space.

25 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotation unit 500 is fixed to the supporting means 410 (see FIG. 23) and is fixed to the inside of the fixing means 510, which is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Both ends fixing means 520 constituting the center of rotation, a shaft forming means 530 fixed to the both ends fixing means 520 and arranged inside the U-shape of the fixing means 510, and an inside of the U-shape of the fixing means 510 and A rotary left lid part 550 arranged on the left side of the shaft forming means 530, a rotary body 560 fastened and fixed to the rotary left lid part 550 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, and fastened and fixed to the right side of the rotary body 560. And a rotating right lid part 570 disposed inside the U-shaped fixing means 510.

To explain the outline of the rotating unit 500, the rotating unit 560 is mainly composed of a rotating portion that is rotationally displaced about the left-right axis, and the fixing means 510 is mainly formed of a fixing portion that supports the rotating portion.

The rotating portion is composed of a rotating body 560, a rotating left plate 550, a motor gear 542 meshed with the rotating left plate 550, and a driven plate 575 of the rotating right lid part 570. 510, both ends fixing means 520, shaft constituting means 530 excluding the motor gear 542, and posture fixing bush 571) of the rotating right lid portion 570 constitute a fixing portion.

The fixing means 510 includes a U-shaped metal plate 511 formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front by bending the metal plate at a right angle, and a U-shaped metal plate that is disposed so as to face each other on the left and right sides of the U-shaped metal plate 511. Mainly includes a left and right fixing lid 514 having a shape capable of forming a closed cross section with the plate 511, and a guide member 516 fastened and fixed from below the U-shaped metal plate 511 to guide the electric wiring DK1. ..

In the description of the left and right fixed lids 514, the closed cross section is not intended to assume complete sealing (adhesion), but may be a closing method according to the purpose of the present embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, since the electric wiring DK1 is passed through the closed cross section, an opening that does not allow the electric wiring DK1 to pass through (for example, an opening having a smaller opening diameter than the thickness of the electric wiring DK1 or , The opening width direction larger than the thickness of the electric wiring DK1 is along the lengthwise direction of the electric wiring DK1, and the accommodation of the electric wiring DK1 is maintained). The details of the route of the electrical wiring DK1 will be described later.

The U-shaped metal plate 511 is formed with female screws and through holes for positioning at appropriate positions of the long plate-shaped portion, and is used for alignment with the left and right fixing lids 514 and the guide member 516 and fastening and fixing.

The U-shaped metal plate 511 is arranged such that both ends of the plate are opposed to each other, and the left and right sides are cut into different shapes. That is, a substantially circular first opening 512 is formed on the left side, and a substantially gourd-shaped second opening 513 and a pair of circular holes 513a are formed on the right side.

The guide member 516 is configured so as to leave a gap between a deformed hole 517 formed in a substantially gourd shape in the up-down direction at the center position in the left-right direction and a U-shaped metal plate 511 on the right side of the deformed hole 517. The bottom portion 518 and a lower extension portion 519 extending downward from the right rear end portion of the lowered bottom portion 518 are mainly provided.

The deformed hole 517 is located above the deformed hole 413 (see FIG. 23) and has a size capable of guiding the electric wiring DK1. The electrical wiring DK1 that has passed above the odd-shaped hole 517 is disposed between the lower bottom portion 518 and the U-shaped metal plate 511, bends upward, and connects the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixing lids 514. It is arranged between them, is arranged on the inner diameter side of the right fixing bush 522 of the both end fixing means 520, and is arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511. The state of the electric wiring DK1 in the route will be described later.

The lower extending portion 519 is a portion configured to support the electric wire DK1 on the side that moves up and down corresponding to the up and down movement with a binding band. That is, the forming portion 411a is formed to the right of the odd-shaped hole 413 of the flat plate portion 411 in a shape capable of fixing the binding band. The electric wiring DK1 is fixed to the forming portion 411a with a binding band, and is fixed to the lower extending portion 519 arranged on the rear side and below the forming portion 411a with a binding band.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be brought closer to the back side, so that the electric wiring DK1 is displaced to the front side and sandwiched between the front upper edge portion of the strip-shaped extending portion 463 and the front hanging portion 414 of the supporting means 410. This can be avoided (see FIG. 23).

In the configuration of the lower extension portion 519, the plate portion forming the right side surface functions as a restriction portion for preventing the binding band from rising. That is, the binding band is maintained in a state of being fixed to the U-shaped portion projecting downward at the lower end portion of the lower extension portion 519, and by restricting the rising of the binding band, the electrical power to the lower extension portion 519 is reduced. The fixed position of the wiring DK1 can be limited to the vicinity of the lower end portion of the lower extension portion 519.

The both end fixing means 520 includes a left fixing bush 521 fitted into the first opening 512 of the U-shaped metal plate 511 from the left side, and a right fixing bush 522 fitted into the second opening 513 from the right side.

The left fixing bush 521 and the right fixing bush 522 are provided with forming portions (convex portions) fitted into notches (recess portions) formed above and below both the first opening 512 and the second opening 513, and these concave and convex fittings are provided. Thus, the posture is stabilized, and the flange-shaped portion formed in a flange shape having a diameter larger than the inner diameters of the first opening 512 and the second opening 513 positions in the axial direction (left-right direction).

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 21 ), the left fixed bush 521 and the right fixed bush 522 are supported by the flange-shaped portion being disposed between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514, and the unevenness The posture is fixed by fitting.

The left fixed bush 521 has a support hole 521a having a D-shaped cross section formed at the rotation shaft position. The support hole 521a is a part that supports one end of the shaft constituting means 530, and details thereof will be described later.

The right fixing bush 522 has a pair of insertion holes 523 formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw that is inserted into the circular hole 513a, and a deformed annular ring that can be fitted in the second opening 513 and protrudes leftward. An annular protrusion 524 and an omission portion 525 in which the formation of the flange-shaped portion is omitted for the purpose of ensuring the passage of the electric wiring DK1 in the substantially lower half portion are mainly provided.

The annular protrusion 524 is formed with a protruding length that exceeds the plate thickness of the U-shaped metal plate 511. This makes it possible to easily adjust the posture of the protruding fastening portion 532 of the shaft forming means 530, but the details will be described later.

The shaft forming means 530 faces a shaft right main body portion 531 that is fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 by screwing a fastening screw that is inserted into the insertion hole 523, and a left side of the shaft right main body portion 531. A shaft left main body 535 arranged and fastened and fixed to the shaft right main body 531; a drive motor 541 fastened and fixed to the left shaft main body 535; and a motor gear 542 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 541. An illumination board 543 disposed on the front side of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the axis left main body portion 535, and a laminated arrangement on the front surface side of the illumination decoration substrate 543, a light diffusion shape is formed on the back surface, A light diffusion plate 545 that is positioned by being sandwiched between the portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535 from the front, rear, left, right, and bottom, and a photocoupler-type detection sensor 547 that is fastened and fixed to the shaft right main body portion 531 from the right side are mainly provided. ..

As described above, the shaft configuring unit 530 includes a plurality of configurations (that is, the drive motor 541, the decorative board 543, and the detection sensor 547) that require the supply of electricity. Therefore, it is considered to be a problem to arrange the electric wiring DK1 compactly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the connection terminals 541a and 547a of the electric wiring DK1 are put together in a region between the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535 facing each other.

That is, the connection terminal 541a of the drive motor 541 is arranged in the motor main body portion which is arranged surrounded by the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535, and is connected to the connection terminal (not shown) of the decorative board 543. ) Is arranged on the back side facing the facing of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535, and the connection terminal 547a of the detection sensor 547 passes through the opening 533a of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft right main body portion 531. Is arranged so as to project to the left side (the shaft left main body 535 side).

As a result, it is possible to supply the electric wire DK1 without excess or deficiency as long as the electric wire DK1 is guided to a region between the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535 facing each other. It can be accommodated in a region between the main body 531 and the shaft left main body 535 facing each other (a region on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped wall extending toward the other side).

Further, fastening of the shaft constituting means 530 and the U-shaped metal plate 511, fastening of the shaft right main body 531 and shaft left main body 535, fastening of the shaft left main body 535 and drive motor 541, shaft right main body 531. The fastening direction of the fastening sensor and the detection sensor 547 is unified in the left-right direction (direction parallel to the rotation axis). Therefore, the radial dimension of the shaft forming means 530 can be easily reduced.

Thus, in addition to being able to integrate the main functional parts by the shaft configuring means 530, the electrical wiring DK1 can be compactly stored. The details of each component of the shaft configuring means 530 will be described below.

The shaft right main body portion 531 is provided with a pair of front and rear portions protruding rightward, and a protruding fastening portion 532 in which a female screw is formed at a protruding tip, and a detection sensor 547 at a position lower than the protruding fastening portion 532. A size that allows the connection terminal 547a to pass therethrough and a size that allows the electrical wiring DK1 (and the connector provided at the tip) to be inserted at a position above the protruding fastening portion 532 and the opening portion 533a that is bored in the left-right direction. Mainly includes a wiring opening 533b formed in the left-right direction and a pair of locking claw portions 534 protruding in a claw shape at a position with a gap on the front side of the front plate portion of the shaft right main body portion 531. Prepare for

The protruding fastening portion 532 has a fixed posture by loosely fitting with the annular protrusion 524 of the right fixing bush 522, and the tip end thereof abuts the U-shaped metal plate 511, and the circular hole 513 a and the insertion hole 523 are inserted. The fastening screw that has been inserted is screwed into the U-shaped metal plate 511 to be fastened and fixed. The protruding fastening portion 532 is inserted into the insertion hole 572 of the posture fixing bush 571, which will be described in detail later.

The locking claw portion 534 is a portion for supporting the decorative board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 so as to be sandwiched in the left-right direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 21). In addition, by sandwiching (directly or indirectly) the decorative board 543 and the light diffusing plate 545 with a pair of restricting protrusions 534a projecting on the front side at the upper and lower ends of the front plate portion, Displacement can be regulated.

The shaft left main body portion 535 includes a plate-shaped portion 536 formed in a plate shape that intersects the rotation axis (horizontal axis) at a right angle, and a cylindrical column-shaped protruding portion from the plate-shaped portion 536 to the right side at the protruding tip. A pair of protruding fastening portions 537 in which female screws are formed, a shaft support portion 538 protruding from the plate portion 536 to the left along the rotation axis in a cylindrical shape, and a front plate portion of the shaft left main body portion 535. It mainly includes a pair of locking claw portions 539 protruding in a claw shape at a position with a gap on the front side.

The protruding fastening portion 537 is provided so as to protrude to the same plane as the plane on which the right end portion of the arc-shaped wall of the shaft left main body portion 535 is arranged. In this case, the arc-shaped wall of the shaft left main body portion 535 and the protruding fastening portion 537 are flush with the plate portion that is the constituent plate portion of the shaft right main body portion 531 and that is arranged in parallel with the plate-shaped portion 536. Can be brought into contact.

As a result, the shaft right main body portion 531 can be stably arranged with respect to the shaft left main body portion 535, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole formed in the right shaft main body portion 531 can be easily projectingly fastened. Since it can be screwed into the female screw at the tip of the portion 537, the shaft right main body portion 531 can be easily fastened and fixed to the shaft left main body portion 535.

The shaft support portion 538 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter slightly shorter than a circular opening formed in a circle in the center of the flanged gear 551 of the rotary left lid portion 550, so that the flanged gear 551 can be rotated. Support. In addition, the shaft support portion 538 has a tip formed in a D-shape slightly smaller than the support hole 521a, so that the shaft support portion 538 can be fitted into the support hole 521a.

That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the shaft support portion 538 is non-rotatably supported by being fitted into the support hole 521a, and functions as a portion that rotatably supports the left rotation lid portion 550.

The locking claw portion 539 is configured to have substantially the same shape as the locking claw portion 534 of the shaft right main body portion 531. In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the lighting board 543 and the light diffusing plate 545 are arranged in the left-right direction. Support it so that it is sandwiched. At this time, the front plate portion and the locking claw portions 534 and 539, which are arranged with a gap on the rear surface side, sandwich the illumination substrate 543 and the light diffusion plate 545, so that the displacement in the front-rear direction can also be restricted. ..

In addition, by sandwiching the lighting board 543 and the light diffusing plate 545 (directly or indirectly) between the pair of restriction projections 539a provided on the front side at the upper and lower ends of the front plate portion, the vertical direction Displacement is regulated.

Thus, the shape of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535 can be used without preparing separate fixing means (for example, a fastening screw) for fixing the decorative substrate 543 and the light diffusion plate 545. As a result, with the fastening and fixing of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535, the decorative board 543 and the light diffusion plate 545 can be fixed to the shaft right main body portion 531 and the shaft left main body portion 535.

The decorative board 543 includes a plurality of LED members 544 arranged vertically side by side at the left end, and the LED members 544 are arranged such that the optical axis extends rightward along the surface of the decorative board 543. There is. The plurality of LED members 544 are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emission colors, it is possible to execute the emission effect of a plurality of colors with a small number of LEDs.

The light diffusing plate 545 has a light diffusing shape formed on the back surface, and this light diffusing shape is formed so that light can be surface-emitted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light diffusing plate 545. Accordingly, the number of the LED members 544 can be reduced, and the rotating body 560 irradiated with the light transmitted through the light diffusion plate 545 can be uniformly illuminated.

The detection sensor 547 is arranged inside the rotating body 560, on the right side opposite to the left side on which the driving force transmission components such as the drive motor 541 and the transmission gear 552 are disposed. As a result, the space inside the rotary body 560 can be effectively used and the rotary body 560 can be compactly arranged.

By disposing the detection sensor 547 inside the rotating body 560, it is possible to easily perform the displacement of the detecting sensor 547 that accompanies the up-and-down displacement of the rotating body 560. In other words, when the detection sensor 547 is arranged outside the rotating body 560, the member that supports the detection sensor 547 is mostly arranged outside the rotating body 560. In this case, In order to move the detection sensor 547 up and down with the up and down displacement, it is necessary to similarly displace the member that supports the detection sensor 547.

On the other hand, when the detection sensor 547 is arranged inside the rotating body 560 as in the present embodiment, by disposing the detecting sensor 547 on a member forming the rotation axis of the rotating body 560, the rotating body The detection sensor 547 can be configured to move up and down in association with the up-and-down displacement of 560 (up-and-down displacement of a member forming the rotation axis).

The detection sensor 547 is arranged such that the detection groove faces the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating body 560. Accordingly, the detected portion 577 protruding from the eccentric position of the rotating body 560 along the axial direction can be configured to pass through the detection groove.

The rotary left lid portion 550 mainly includes a flanged gear 551 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 538, and a driven plate 555 that is fixed to the flanged gear 551 in the rotational direction.

The flanged gear 551 includes a transmission gear 552 arranged to be meshable with the motor gear 542, and a stepped disc-shaped stepped member extending radially outward from an axial end of the transmission gear 552. The disc portion 553 and the stepped disc portion 553 project from a specific position on the outer circumference of the small-diameter circle (positions at 120-degree intervals that divide the circumference into three equal parts in the present embodiment) toward the outer circumference of the large-diameter circle. It mainly includes a plurality of protruding portions 554 that are provided.

The driven plate 555 is provided with an irregular opening 556 that is formed in a shape slightly larger than a shape that continuously connects the small-diameter circle of the stepped disc portion 553 and the outer shape of the protruding portion 554 in the rotation axis direction.

The deformed opening 556 is fitted onto the small-diameter circle of the stepped disc portion 553 and the protruding portion 554 to prevent the driven plate 555 from being displaced relative to the flanged gear 551 in the rotational direction.

Further, since the large-diameter circle of the stepped disc portion 553 has a shape larger than the irregular opening 556, the flanged gear 551 is restricted from penetrating the irregular opening 556 to the right.

The shape of the left side surface of the flanged gear 551 is between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the U-shaped metal plate 511 in a state in which the left side surface of the gear 551 is in contact with an overhanging portion formed in an annular shape rightward from the periphery of the support hole 521a of the left fixed bush 521. It is designed in a shape with a gap.

Accordingly, when the rotating body 560 rotates, the left side surface of the flanged gear 551 can be configured to rub only against the annular protruding portion of the left fixed bush 521, and the flanged gear 551 and the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be configured. It is possible to avoid rubbing between and. Therefore, the wear of the gear 551 with the flange can be suppressed.

The rotating body 560 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes four plate-shaped members having different or identical patterns or figures formed on the surface thereof. The rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating right lid portion 570. Although it is fastened and fixed to form a substantially cubic shape, details will be described later.

The rotating right lid portion 570 is rotatably supported by the posture fixing bush 571 having a pair of insertion holes 572 through which the projecting fastening portions 532 of the shaft forming means 530 can be inserted, and the posture fixing bush 571. The driven plate 575 is mainly provided.

The posture fixing bush 571 is configured such that the outer diameter of the outer peripheral surface is different, like the stepped disc portion 553 of the flanged gear 551. That is, the right end portion has a larger diameter than the left side portion thereof, thereby defining the limit position when the driven plate 575 is displaced rightward with respect to the posture fixing bush 571. This can prevent the driven plate 575 from falling off the posture fixing bush 571.

The driven plate 575 is provided with a centered axially supported hole 576 formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the small diameter circle of the posture fixing bush 571, and an arcuate shape concentric with the center axis of the shaft supported hole 576. Mainly includes a detected part 577 protruding leftward.

The driven plate 575 is arranged in the gap (see FIG. 30A) between the right end of the arc-shaped portion arranged on the right side of the shaft right main body portion 531 and the flange-shaped portion of the posture fixing bush 571. As a result, displacement in the rotation axis direction (horizontal direction) is restricted.

Further, since the driven plate 575 is supported in a manner that it slides on the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter cylindrical portion of the posture fixing bush 571, the driven plate 575 can rotate during rotation as compared with the case where the driven plate 575 is supported by a small-diameter rotating shaft. It is possible to stabilize the posture.

The detected part 577 is arranged so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21). The presence or absence of the detected portion 577 by the detection sensor 547 (the detected portion 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547, or the non-formed range of the detected portion 577 faces the detection sensor 547, It is possible to cause the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the posture of the rotating body 560 by determining whether or not the posture has not entered the portion 577.

FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating body 560, and FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body 560 and the rotating right lid portion 570. In FIG. 27, the facing surface between the rotating left lid portion 550 and the rotating body 560 is illustrated in a posture facing the front side, and in FIG. 28, the facing surface between the rotating right lid portion 570 and the rotating body 560 faces the front side. It is illustrated by. That is, the front side is separated from the back side of the facing surface as an axis.

Since the rotating body 560 is formed in a rectangular tubular shape by a plurality of (four sheets in the present embodiment) surface constituting members 560a to 560d having similar shapes, the surface constituting member 560a will be described in detail. Only the differences between the other surface constituting members 560b to 560d will be described, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The surface constituting member 560a has a substantially square plate-shaped portion 561 that forms an outer wall of the rotating body 560 with a decorative pattern formed on the outer surface, and a plate-shaped portion that is rotationally symmetrical with respect to the center point of the plate-shaped portion 561. 561 includes a pair of symmetrical overhang portions 562 that are formed to extend inward from the left and right end portions of 561.

The symmetric overhanging portion 562 is formed by stacking the facing plate portion 563 facing the driven plate 555 or the driven plate 575 and the inside and left sides of the facing plate portion 563, and projecting to the outside of the facing plate portion 563. Mainly includes a left and right facing portion 564, a fastening assisting portion 565 that is stacked inside the left and right facing portion 564 to secure a screwed thickness, and an attitude adjusting portion 566 that is formed in the facing plate portion 563. ..

The plate-shaped portion 561 has different decorative patterns on the surface constituting members 560a to 560d. As a result, the rotating body 560 rotates, and the surface forming members 560a to 560d facing the player side change (periodically), so that a plurality of types of figures or patterns visually recognized through the rotating body 560 (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). 4 types).

More specifically, on the surface of the plate-shaped portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560a, a decorative pattern made up of a figure showing “Δ” (triangle, triangle), on the surface of the plate-shaped portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560b, A decorative pattern made up of figures showing "?" (question mark), and a decorative pattern made up of figures showing "!" (exclamation mark) on the surface of the plate portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560c. On the surface of the plate-shaped portion 561 of the member 560d, a decorative pattern made up of a figure indicating “◯” (circle, circle) is formed.

In the composite operation unit 402 in which the left and right four are arranged side by side (see FIG. 19), a common decorative pattern is formed on the surface forming members 560a, 560b, 560d, while the surface forming member 560c is formed. Different decorative patterns are formed.

That is, on the surface of the plate-shaped portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560c of the compound motion unit 402 arranged on the leftmost side, a decorative pattern composed of a figure showing "H" is arranged second from the left end. On the surface of the plate-shaped portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560c of 402, a decorative pattern including a figure indicating "I" is arranged third from the left end of the plate-shaped portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560c of the combined operation unit 402. On the surface of the plate, a decorative pattern consisting of a figure showing “T” is displayed on the surface of the plate-like portion 561 of the surface constituting member 560c of the composite operation unit 402 arranged on the rightmost side with “!” (exclamation mark). ), a decorative pattern made up of figures is formed, and its use will be described later.

The facing plate portion 563 is formed such that the surface of the central portion on the rotation axis side is formed in an arc shape that forms a part of the same circle with the surface forming members 560a to 560d, and one side of the front and rear ends (the front side of the surface forming member 560a). ), a convex portion 563a is formed, and a concave portion 563b is formed on the other side (the rear side of the surface constituting member 560a).

The concave portion 563b is formed in such a shape that the convex portion 563a can be fitted in the state in which the convex portion 563a is rotated by 90 degrees about the horizontal axis. For example, the concave portion 563b on the left side of the surface forming member 560a is provided with a convex portion 563a on the lower side of the surface forming member 560b corresponding to a state of being rotated 90 degrees about the horizontal axis with respect to the surface forming member 560a. Mating. At the same time, the concave portion 563b on the lower side of the surface constituting member 560b is fitted to the convex portion 563a on the left side of the surface constituting member 560a.

If the above conditions are satisfied, the shapes of the convex shape portion 563a and the concave shape portion 563b can be set arbitrarily. For example, the shape may be angular, semicircular, or inclined. In the present embodiment, the projecting shape portion 563a is configured as a location where the fastening force of the fastening screw is exerted by making the projecting shape portion 563a a female screw of a size that can be configured.

In a similar manner, the adjacent surface constituting members 560a to 560d are fitted to each other so that they can be aligned in a rectangular tubular shape. The lateral displacement of the surface forming members 560a to 560d is prevented by the left and right facing portion 564.

That is, in a state in which the surface constituting members 560a to 560d form a rectangular tubular shape, the left and right facing portions 564 contact the concave portions 563b of the adjacent surface constituting members 560a to 560d from the inside in the left-right direction (opposing arrangement). Be done).

For example, with respect to the left-right facing portion 564 arranged on the front side of the surface forming member 560a, the concave shape portion 563b arranged on the lower side of the surface forming member 560d is continuous from the left side thereof (outside in the left-right direction of the rotating body 560). The right side faces abut (opposed). That is, after arranging the rectangular tubular shape so that it can be configured, by displacing the surface forming member 560d to the right with respect to the surface forming member 560a, the horizontal position of the surface forming member 560d with respect to the surface forming member 560a is adjusted. be able to.

Further, with respect to the left-right facing portion 564 arranged on the lower side (lower right side) of the surface forming member 560d, a concave shape arranged on the front side of the surface forming member 560a from the right side thereof (the outer side in the left-right direction of the rotating body 560). The left side surface continuous with the portion 563b abuts (opposed). That is, after arranging the rectangular tubular shape so that it can be configured, by displacing the surface forming member 560d to the right with respect to the surface forming member 560a, the horizontal position of the surface forming member 560d with respect to the surface forming member 560a is adjusted. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the shape of the symmetric overhanging portion 562 rotationally symmetric with respect to the center point of the plate-shaped portion 561, one adjacent surface component member (for example, the surface component member). By displacing the other surface forming member (for example, the surface forming member 560d) in the left and right directions with respect to 560a), the left and right positions of the other surface forming member can be aligned with the one surface forming member.

The attitude adjusting portion 566 is formed as the attitude adjusting portions 566a to 566d in each of the surface constituting members 560a to 560d, and is configured as a through hole having a different shape in each of the surface constituting members 560a to 560d.

That is, the posture adjusting portion 566a formed on the surface forming member 560a is formed in a circular cross section, and the posture adjusting portion 566b formed on the surface forming member 560b has a short direction along the extending direction of the plate portion 561. The attitude adjusting portion 566c formed in the surface forming member 560c in a rectangular shape is formed in the surface forming member 560d in a rectangular shape having a long direction along the extending direction of the plate portion 561. The portion 566d has a regular triangular cross section.

The driven plate 555 includes a plurality of fitting protrusions 555a to 555d that are provided in a shape corresponding to the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d from positions where the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d can be inserted.

That is, the pair of fitting projections 555a are projected in a circular cross section, and the pair of fitting projections 555b are projected in a rectangular shape whose sides along the adjacent sides of the driven plate 555 are short. The fitting protrusions 555c are formed in a rectangular shape with long sides in the direction along the adjacent sides of the driven plate 555, and the pair of fitting protrusions 555d are formed in a regular triangular cross section.

The driven plate 575 includes a plurality of fitting protrusions 575a to 575d that are provided so as to project from positions that can be inserted into the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d in a shape corresponding to the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d.

That is, the pair of fitting protrusions 575a are provided with a circular cross section, and the pair of fitting protrusions 575b are provided with a rectangular shape in which the side along the adjacent side of the driven plate 575 is short. The fitting convex portion 575c is formed in a rectangular shape with long sides in the direction along the adjacent side of the driven plate 575, and the pair of fitting convex portions 575d is formed in a regular triangular cross section.

In this way, by configuring the attitude adjusting portions 566a to 566d, the fitting convex portions 555a to 555d, and the fitting convex portions 575a to 575d in a corresponding shape, the rotating left lid portion in a state where the relative angle is appropriate. The 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid portion 570 can be fitted and can be fastened and fixed.

In addition, as an actual assembling procedure, after assembling all four surface constituting members 560a to 560d of the rotating body 560, fitting them in a rectangular tube shape, aligning the left and right positions, and then fitting the convex protrusion of the rotating left lid portion 550. The parts 555a to 555d are fitted to the posture adjusting parts 566a to 566d of the rotating body 560, and the fastening screws inserted in the insertion holes formed at the four corners are screwed into the female threads of the convex shaped part 563a, thereby rotating the rotating body. 560 and the rotating left lid portion 550 can be fastened and fixed. Then, the rotating right lid portion 570 can also be fastened and fixed to the rotating body 560 by screwing the fastening screw in the same procedure.

In the present embodiment, the fitting direction and the fastening fixing direction of the rotary left lid portion 550 and the rotary right lid portion 570 with respect to the posture adjusting portions 566a to 566d of the rotating body 560 are both left and right directions (directions parallel to the rotation axis). Is designed to be.

Accordingly, the fastening screw can be removed from the outer surface (display surface) of each of the surface constituting members 560a to 560d of the rotating body 560, so that the fastening screw can be prevented from being visually recognized on the display surface. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a seal member for hiding the fastening screw, and to form a decorative pattern by using the entire area (entire area) of the outer surface (display surface) of each surface constituting member 560a to 560d. Therefore, the size (area, that is, density) of the decorative pattern can be increased with respect to the size (area) of each of the constituent members 560a to 560d.

Here, for example, even if one surface constituting member (for example, the surface constituting member 560a) is fastened and fixed to the rotary left lid portion 550, and then another surface constituting member (for example, the surface constituting member 560d) is to be assembled. The fitting convex portion 555d of the rotary left lid portion 550 that is fastened and fixed to the one surface constituting member 560a interferes with the facing plate portion 563 of the other surface constituting member 560d. Therefore, the concave portion 563b of the other surface constituting member 560d cannot be slid between the left and right facing portions 564 of the one surface constituting member 560a and the driven plate 555, and cannot be assembled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotary left lid portion 550 and the rotary right lid portion 570 can be fastened and fixed only after all the surface constituting members 560a to 560d are combined into a rectangular tubular shape. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an erroneous assembly (for example, assembly in a state where any one of the surface constituting members 560a to 560d is insufficient).

That is, in the present embodiment, the fitting protrusions 555a to 555d and 575a to 575d have the effect of strengthening the rigidity of the rotating left lid portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid portion 570 by fitting, and as a fitting target. The effect of being able to assemble the rotating left lid 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid 570 in an appropriate attitude by matching the shape with the attitude adjusting portions 566a to 566d, and limiting each assembly procedure The effect of preventing forgetting to assemble the members 560a to 560d can be simultaneously achieved.

29A and 29B are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400. 29(a) and 29(b) are perspective views viewed from different directions, and the rotation unit 500 is arranged with its lower surface facing the front side.

The annular protrusion 412 is a C-shaped protrusion in a top view having a dividing portion 412a (break) on the right side, and a protruding shape portion 516a corresponding to this dividing portion 412a is formed on the lower surface of the guide member 516. ..

In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the posture of the rotary unit 500 with respect to the support means 410 is defined by disposing the projecting shape portion 516a in the dividing portion 412a. With the posture of the rotation unit 500 being regulated, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 413a is screwed into the fastening portion 517a formed with the female screw, whereby the guide member 516 is fastened and fixed to the support means 410. It

In the assembled state (see FIG. 21), the odd-shaped holes 413 and the odd-shaped holes 517 communicate with each other as a passage path of the electric wiring DK1, but have different internal shapes forming the outer frame of the passage path. This difference in shape corresponds to the difference in the form of the electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 21) guided from the odd-shaped hole 413 or the odd-shaped hole 517.

More specifically, the electrical wiring DK1 is vertically displaced below the deformed hole 413 as the supporting means 410 moves up and down, and above the deformed hole 517 (on the side of the rotation unit 500) regardless of the arrangement of the supporting means 410. Instead, it is fixed. Therefore, it is preferable that the lower part of the deformed hole 413 is easily adapted to the vertical displacement, and the upper part of the deformed hole 517 is preferably adapted to the route for fixing the electric wiring DK1. Hereinafter, the aspect of the electrical wiring DK1 of the present embodiment from this viewpoint will be described.

In the present embodiment, below the odd-shaped hole 413, the electric wiring DK1 formed of a bundle of a plurality of electric wires has a tubular member made of a flexible resin material and a spiral cut (a so-called, Spiral tube) is bundled into a wire bundle with a circular cross section.

In the present embodiment, the spiral tube is wound at least in the range of the electric wiring DK1 that can enter (enter and exit) the wiring assisting means 460.

Since the electric wiring DK1 is configured as a bundle of electric wires having a circular cross section, the resistance against the bending of the electric wiring DK1 and the direction in which the electric wiring DK1 is curved as the supporting means 410 moves up and down. It can be configured so that a large difference does not occur in the load applied due to the bending.

The deformed hole 413 has the front-rear width of the deformed hole 413 shortened in the left-right direction as compared with the shape of the deformed hole 517 so that the electric wiring DK1 can be easily arranged into a bundle of electric wires having a circular cross section. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 from being arranged so as to spread in the front-rear direction, while it is possible to easily arrange the electric wires so as to spread in the left-right direction even when there are many electric wires. When the DK1 is guided to the right from the deformed hole 413 and fixed by the forming portion 411a by a fixing member such as a binding band, it is possible to easily form a wire bundle having a short front-rear width and a substantially circular cross section.

The cross-sectional shape of the electric wire bundle of the electric wiring DK1 does not need to be circular, and various modes are exemplified. For example, as the number of electric wires forming the electric wiring DK1 increases, the cross section of the electric wire bundle tends to have an elliptical shape that is long and left and right, but even in this case, as compared with the case where the electric wiring DK1 is curved left and right. As a result, the resistance and load when bending in the front-back direction can be reduced. Curving in the front-back direction is a mode of curving that is likely to occur in the present embodiment, but details will be described later.

FIG. 30A is a front exploded perspective view of a part of the configuration of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view schematically showing a harness that constitutes the electric wiring DK1. As shown in FIG. 30B, the electric wiring DK1 has a mode in which a plurality of flexible electric wires covered by a connector as a connection end are connected and fixed at substantially equal intervals.

In the rotating unit 500 of the present embodiment, connectors are respectively connected to the drive motor 541, the detection sensor 547, and the decorative board 543, and the total number of electric wires extending from each connector is 16.

In FIG. 30A, in the rotation unit 500, a U-shaped metal plate 511, a right and left fixed lid 514, a guide member 516, both end fixing means 520, a shaft right main body portion 531 and a shaft left main body. The portion 535, the drive motor 541, the detection sensor 547, and the posture fixing bush 571 are shown, and the left and right fixing lids 514 and the guide members 516 are shown at a distance from the U-shaped metal plate 511 and are fixed left and right. Only the lid 514 is shown in a different view.

In FIG. 30A, the guidance of the electric wiring DK1 to the rotary unit 500 will be mainly described. The electric wiring DK1 that has passed through the deformed hole 517 upward is crawled into a gap having a long front-rear width and a short vertical width between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518. It is preferable that the sheets are arranged so that they are lined up in front and back rather than being piled up and down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide member 516 is formed at the right end of the deformed hole 517 so as to step down from the lower bottom portion 518 in a fan shape in a top view, and extends in the front-rear direction of the plurality of electric wires forming the electric wiring DK1. The fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is provided for adjusting the degree of spread. The function of the fan-shaped adjusting unit 517b will be described with reference to FIG.

31A is a top view of the guide member 516, and FIG. 31B is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electric wiring DK1 taken along line XXXIb-XXXXIb of FIG. 31A. 31C is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electric wiring DK1 taken along line XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31A, and FIG. 31D is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 taken along line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. 31E is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 31E is a cross-sectional view of the guide member 516 and the electric wiring DK1 taken along the line XXXIe-XXXIe of FIG. 31D.

31(a) and 31(d), a part of the route of each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 guided through the odd-shaped hole 517 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. In (c) and FIG. 31(e), an example of the arrangement of the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 is shown.

That is, each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 is a lower corner portion where the deformed hole 517 and the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b form two surfaces, and a corner portion arranged on the right side of the lower corner portion, which is the lower bottom portion 518 and the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b. Is curved so as to be arranged (contacted) in close proximity to the upper corner portion forming the two surfaces, and in this state, the front-rear wall portion of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b is restricted from being dispersed (spread) in the front-rear direction (FIG. 31). (A) and FIG.31(c)).

In other words, the degree of dispersion of the electric wiring DK1 can be adjusted by adjusting the formation angle of the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the fan-shaped adjustment is performed so that the extension line 517x linearly extending from the ends of the front and rear wall portions of the fan-shaped adjustment portion 517b in a top view is a straight line that reaches the corner of the lowered bottom portion 518. The front and rear wall portions of the portion 517b are configured.

This maximizes the degree of dispersion of the electric wiring DK1 while the electric wiring DK1 is arranged on one plane (the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518) on the upper side of the irregular hole 517. be able to. That is, in the vicinity of the right end portion of the lowered bottom portion 518, the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 can be easily distributed and arranged in the front-rear width of the lowered bottom portion 518 (see FIG. 31B).

In the present embodiment, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is designed such that the front-rear spacing at the left end is approximately 6.4 [mm], and the front and rear inclined walls have an inclination angle of 35 degrees (center angle 70 degrees) with respect to the left-right direction. It

As shown in FIG. 31B, the electric wires of the electrical wiring DK1 do not extend vertically over the range from the right end portion of the lowered bottom portion 518 to the central portion of the fastening portion 516b, but the bottom surface of the lowered bottom portion 518. The electric wires can be placed in contact with each other. That is, a dimension required for arranging the electric wires each having an outer diameter (about 0.7 [mm] in this embodiment) side by side on the same plane (about 16.2 [mm] for 16 wires in this embodiment). ]) The front-back width (about 15.4 [mm] in this embodiment) of the above dimensions is secured.

Thereby, even if the depth of the lowered bottom portion 518 (the gap dimension between the lower surface of the U-shaped metal plate 511) is designed to be small (about 2 [mm] in the present embodiment), the electrical wiring DK1 is surrounded. It is possible to easily prevent a compressive load from being applied to the electrical wiring DK1 from the assembled components.

Various shapes are exemplified as the shape of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b. For example, when the front-rear width is large compared to the shape of the present embodiment, each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 can be widened to the front-rear width of the lower bottom 518 from the vicinity of the left and right central portions of the lower bottom 518, and the width of the passage path of the electric wire Since there is an advantage in that the load applied to the wires from the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b can be reduced even when the number of wires is large, the front and rear walls of the guide member 516 can be provided before reaching the right end of the lower bottom 518. There is also a drawback that the electric wire may be curved (bent) in the plane close to the portion and between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518.

Further, for example, when the front-back width is smaller than the shape of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wire will be curved (bent) in the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518. On the other hand, since the width of the passage of the electric wire is narrowed, there is also a drawback that the load applied to the electric wire from the fan-shaped adjusting unit 517b tends to increase when the number of electric wires is large.

Therefore, the shape of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b in the present embodiment is advantageous in that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wire will be curved (bent) on the plane between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom portion 518 (electrical wiring). It is a preferable shape in that the width of the passage path of the electric wire can be ensured to the maximum while securing the advantage that the DK1 can be lowered along the horizontal straight line and reach the right end portion of the bottom portion 518. I can say.

Further, the extension line 517x serves as a guide for the placement range of each electric wire of the electrical wiring DK1 and mainly serves as a guideline for the outer edge of the placement, but is configured so as to intersect at the right side of the center of the deformed hole 517. In other words, the extension line 517x intersects on the right side of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of upper and lower fastening portions 517a.

Accordingly, the position where the electric wires of the electric wiring DK1 are gathered on the lower side of the odd-shaped hole 517 can be arranged to the right of the center of the odd-shaped hole 517 (see FIG. 31(e)). Therefore, as schematically illustrated in FIG. 31D, even if the electric wiring DK1 passes only the rightward range of the deformed hole 517 in relation to the arrangement of the forming portion 411a, each electric wire is sufficient. The electric wiring DK1 can be guided to the forming portion 411a (see FIG. 23) in a state of being integrated.

In this way, the irregular holes 517 are formed in a shape that can assist the change in the degree (state) of dispersion of the electrical wiring DK1 before and after the passage. Therefore, as compared with the case where the degree of distribution (state) of each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 changes rapidly, the possibility that each electric wire bends can be reduced, and the load given to the electric wiring DK1 can be reduced. be able to.

The guide member 516 includes a plurality of fastening portions 516b each including a positioning pin used for fastening with the U-shaped metal plate 511 and an insertion hole for fastening the fastening screw that is fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511. There is.

Since the fastening portion 516b is also arranged on the lower bottom portion 518 where the electric wiring DK1 is arranged, the arrangement area of the electric wiring DK1 is slightly limited, but in the present embodiment, the arrangement is made so as to minimize this limitation. I am devising.

First, by arranging a plurality of fastening portions 516b on the opposite side (left side) of the lower bottom portion 518 as a position that does not interfere with the electrical wiring DK1 and securing the fastening force, the number of the fastening portions 516b arranged on the lower bottom portion 518 is minimized. I keep it to.

Note that the fastening portion 516b may not be arranged in the lower bottom portion 518, but in that case, due to the weight of the electric wiring DK1 fixed to the lower extension portion 519, vibration or load generated when the rotating unit 500 moves up and down. The U-shaped metal plate 511 and the lower bottom 518 may be misaligned. In order to avoid this, the guide member 516 may be configured to have a large thickness, but in that case, the thickness of the guide member 516 in a front view becomes large and the rotating body 560 becomes difficult to stand out. Profit is generated.

That is, in the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions 516b at the minimum number in the lowered bottom portion 518, the guide member 516 is configured to be thin while maintaining the effect of ensuring the arrangement width of the electric wiring DK1. Thus, the effect of strengthening the presence of the rotating body 560 in a front view can be obtained.

In addition, by making the fastening portion 516b on the left side the fastening portion 516b on the side far from the right end of the lowered bottom portion 518, the degree to which the arrangement width of the electrical wiring DK1 is reduced can be minimized.

The fastening portion 516b arranged on the lower bottom portion 518 is provided with a positioning pin 516c similarly to the fastening portion 516b arranged on the left side of the guide member 516 (see FIG. 30(a)), but the positioning pin 516c has already been fastened. The electric wiring DK1 is arranged at a position where the electric wiring DK1 cannot be arranged by the portion 516b. That is, it is arranged on a straight line that is drawn from the deformed hole 517 and overlaps with the fastening portion 516b, and on the opposite side of the deformed hole 517 with respect to the fastening portion 516b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the positioning pin 516c from narrowing the arrangement range (arrangement width) of the electrical wiring DK1. Therefore, it is easy to dispose the guide member 516 on the U-shaped metal plate 511 by the positioning pin 516c. It is possible to secure the wiring range (arrangement width) of the electrical wiring DK1 while securing the property.

Returning to FIG. 30A, description will be made. The electric wiring DK1 that has reached the right end of the lowered bottom portion 518 is curved upward along the plate left surface of the left and right fixed lid 514, and thereafter disposed between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lid 514. To be done.

The left and right fixed lids 514 are extended to a position where the main body plate portion 514a formed in a flat plate shape and the front and rear upper and lower surfaces of the U-shaped metal plate 511 are arranged along the outer shape of the main body plate portion 514a. A space securing portion 514c that is formed so as to fill a corner formed by the extended frame portion 514b and the extended frame portion 514b and the main body plate portion 514a, and is retracted toward the main body plate portion 514a side with respect to the extended frame portion 514b. And a positioning pin that is formed in a part of the space securing portion 514c and is used for fastening with the U-shaped metal plate 511, and an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw that is fastened to the U-shaped metal plate 511. A fastening portion 514d and a jig hole 514e formed in the main body plate portion 514a at the front and rear positions of the fastening portion 514b are mainly provided.

The space securing portion 514c is formed at a position where the space securing portion 514c contacts the U-shaped metal plate 511 in the left-right direction, and as a result, the thickness of the space securing portion 514c generated between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the main body plate portion 514a. The electric wiring DK1 is crawled in the gap.

The fastening portion 514d is provided on the front side similarly to the fastening portion 516b provided on the lower bottom portion 518. As a result, the range in which the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed can be continuously secured on the rear side from the lower bottom 518 to the left and right fixed lids 514.

Here, by disposing the fastening portions 514d and 516b on the front side, it is possible to reduce the degree of deterioration of the performance with respect to the looseness of the fastening screw. For example, when the fastening portions 514d and 516b are arranged on the rear side, the displacement with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 increases when the fastening screw is loosened because it is the front side portion that is easily visible to the player. There is a risk that the performance may deteriorate.

On the other hand, when the fastening screws of the fastening portions 514d and 516b arranged on the front side become loose, the displacement with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 becomes large at the rear side portion where the fastening screw is not arranged. Since the rear portion is a portion that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is difficult for the player to notice the looseness of the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of deterioration of the performance.

Further, since the positioning pin of the fastening portion 514d is arranged so as to overlap with the top and bottom of the insertion hole (longitudinal direction of the electric wiring DK1), the insertion hole and the positioning pin minimize the degree to which the arrangement range of the electric wiring DK1 is narrowed. Can be suppressed to

In the jig hole 514e, the electric wiring DK1 is sandwiched (crushed) between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the space securing portion 514c when the left and right fixed lids 514 are assembled to the U-shaped metal plate 511. In order to avoid this, an opening for inserting a jig (not shown) for adjusting the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 from the outside.

From this viewpoint, the jig hole 514e becomes unnecessary after the assembling work is completed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the jig holes 514e are formed in the left and right positions that are difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible that the production effect is deteriorated by the jig holes 514e being visually recognized by the player. Can be prevented.

The electric wiring DK1 arranged between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixing lids 514 passes through the inner diameter side of the right fixing bush 522 of the both end fixing means 520 and is arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511. It Electric wires can be supplied by connecting each electric wire of the electric wiring DK1 arranged inside the U-shaped metal plate 511 to the drive motor 541, the decorative substrate 543, and the detection sensor 547.

Here, the electrical wiring DK1 passes not only inside the right fixed bush 522 but also inside the shaft right main body portion 531, the shaft left main body portion 535, and the posture fixing bush 571. As a result, the electrical wiring DK1 contacts the rotating portion of the rotating unit 500 (the rotating body 560, the rotating left plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the rotating left plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right lid portion 570). This can be physically prevented.

Further, the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the inside of the shaft right main body portion 531 disposed on the right side which is the left and right opposite side of the shaft left main body portion 535 to which the drive motor 541 is fastened and fixed, and is provided inside the U-shaped metal plate 511. It is arranged at a position on the opposite side of the drive motor 541 with respect to the projecting fastening portion 537, that is, the projecting fastening portion 537 and the arc-shaped extension extending rightward along the outer shape of the shaft left main body portion 535. It is arranged between the installation portion 535a.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be arranged away from the drive motor 541, so that it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK1 from becoming hot and damaged by the heat generated from the drive motor 541. Further, this effect is produced by arranging the electric wiring DK1 with respect to the protruding fastening portion 537 as the fastening portion, and without adding a separate dedicated member for disposing the electric wiring DK1 away from the drive motor 541. Since it can be performed, the product cost can be reduced.

The vertical movement of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. 32 to 34, the first operation unit 400 that moves up and down is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 32 shows the state in which the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position, FIG. 33 shows the state in which the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the middle position of the vertical movement width, and FIG. The state in which 500 is arranged in the raised position is shown.

32A is a left side view of the combined operation unit 402, FIG. 32B is a front view of the combined operation unit 402, and FIG. 32C is a right side view of the combined operation unit 402. Is. Note that in FIG. 32(a), for easy understanding, the back side of the metal plate portion 432 is shown by being transparent, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 32(c). The illustration of the right side member 468 is omitted.

33(a) is a left side view of the combined operation unit 402, FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the combined operation unit 402, and FIG. 33(c) is a right side of the combined operation unit 402. It is a side view. Note that in FIG. 33A, the metal plate portion 432 is shown through the metal plate portion 432 for the sake of easy understanding, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is shown in phantom lines. The illustration of the right side member 468 is omitted.

34(a) is a left side view of the combined operation unit 402, FIG. 34(b) is a front view of the combined operation unit 402, and FIG. 34(c) is a right side of the combined operation unit 402. It is a side view. Note that, in FIG. 34( a ), in order to facilitate understanding, the back side of the metal plate portion 432 is shown by being transparent, and the outer shape of the metal plate portion 432 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34( c ). The illustration of the right side member 468 is omitted.

First, the operation of the transmission means 450 by the driving means 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32(a), 33(a) and 34(a). When the drive gear 441a rotates as the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 of the drive unit 440 rotates, a transmission gear 451 meshed with the drive gear 441a, an intermediate gear 452 meshed with the transmission gear 451, and The rotating arm member 453 in which the gear portion 453a is meshed with the intermediate gear 452 simultaneously rotates.

When the drive gear 441a is rotated clockwise in the left side view from the state shown in FIG. 32(a), the rotating arm member 453 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, and as shown in FIG. The member 442 is stopped at a position where it abuts on a rotation restricting portion 442f extending leftward from the upper end of the partition plate portion 442a.

Conversely, when the drive gear 441a is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view from the state shown in FIG. 34(a), the rotating arm member 453 rotates clockwise in the left side view, and as shown in FIG. 32(a). When the detected plate portion 453d is inserted into the detection sensor 442d, it is detected that the rotating arm member 453 is arranged at the rotation end position (see FIG. 32A), and the drive motor 441 is driven. Stop controlled.

At the end position of this operation, the connecting member 454 connected to the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 453 and the inner wall of the penetrating elongated hole 416a of the supporting means 410 in the left-right direction (displacement of the supporting means 410 is allowed). The rotation of the rotating arm member 453 is restricted by the contact in a direction perpendicular to the direction), so that it is not necessary to intentionally provide an additional contact part (for example, a part corresponding to the rotation restriction part 442f). I haven't.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a), 33(a) and 34(a), the detected plate portion 453d is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 453, and is detected. The sensor 442d has a posture in which the detection groove overlaps the arc, and the base end side portion of the detection groove is arranged radially outside the arc.

Thereby, the detection plate 453d can be detected by the detection sensor 442d, and even if the rotation arm member 453 rotates beyond the rotation end position (position in FIG. 32(a)), detection is performed. It is possible to prevent the detected plate portion 453d from colliding with the base end side portion of the detection groove of the sensor 442d.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at the raised position of the rotary unit 500, the fastening screw insertion hole of the end plate member 421 is arranged inside the cutout portion of the metal plate portion 432, so the fastening screw is turned by a screwdriver. be able to.

That is, at the time of assembly, the laminating unit 420 and the supporting unit 410 can be fixed by arranging the rotary unit 500 at the raised position, and at the time of maintenance, the rotary unit 500 is arranged at the raised position. The operation of releasing the fixing between the laminating means 420 and the supporting means 410 can be performed.

The assembly order of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400 and the rotation unit 500 will be described. 23, FIG. 24, FIG. 25, FIG. 26, FIG. 30(a) and FIG. 31 will be referred to in the description of the assembly sequence.

First, the rotation unit 500 is assembled. At that time, the respective components of the shaft configuring means 530 are assembled and integrated in a state in which one end of the electric wiring DK1 corresponding to the drive motor 541, the decorative substrate 543 and the detection sensor 547 is connected. At this time, the other end of the electric wiring DK1 is exposed outside through the wiring opening 533b (see FIGS. 25 and 30(a)).

Next, the rotary left lid portion 550, the rotary body 560, and the rotary right lid portion 570 are assembled and integrated with the shaft forming means 530. At this time, the other end of the electric wiring DK1 is exposed outside through the central opening of the posture fixing bush 571 (see FIGS. 25 and 30(a)).

In the state where the rotating left lid portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid portion 570 are integrated, the distance between the left surface of the flanged gear 551 and the right surface of the posture fixing bush 571 is equal to that of the U-shaped metal plate 511. It is configured to be slightly shorter than the distance between the plate portions that are arranged opposite to each other as the tip portions.

Therefore, the assembly in which the rotary left lid portion 550, the rotary body 560, and the rotary right lid portion 570 are integrated can be arranged between the plate portions facing each other as the tip portion of the U-shaped metal plate 511. At this time, the protruding fastening portion 532 is arranged in accordance with the position of the circular hole 513a.

Next, the both-end fixing means 520 is fitted from the left and right outer sides of the U-shaped metal plate 511. At this time, the other end side of the electric wiring DK1 passes through the center opening of the right fixing bush 522 and is exposed outside (see FIG. 30A).

The both-ends fixing means 520 and the U-shaped metal plate 511 are shaped such that rotation of the both-ends fixing means 520 with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be restricted (for example, uneven fitting), and the both-ends fixing means 520 and the shaft configuration. The shape of the means 530 is such that rotation of the shaft forming means 530 with respect to the both end fixing means 520 can be restricted (for example, fitting in a D-shaped cross section). Therefore, the rotation of the shaft forming means 530 with respect to the U-shaped metal plate 511 can be restricted (see FIG. 25).

By inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 523 and screwing the fastening screw into the projecting fastening portion 532, the shaft forming means 530 can be fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511. Thereby, the U-shaped metal plate 511, the both end fixing means 520, the shaft forming means 530, the rotating left lid portion 550, the rotating body 560, and the rotating right lid portion 570 can be integrated. The left fixing bush 521 of the both end fixing means 520 is to be prevented from coming off by the left and right fixing lids 514, and the disposition of the fastening screw is omitted.

Next, the left and right fixing lids 514 and the guide members 516 are fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511. At this time, the other end of the electric wiring DK1 is exposed downward through the deformed hole 517 of the guide member 516 (see FIG. 30(a)).

In order to narrow the gap between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514, a plurality of electric wires DK1 arranged between the U-shaped metal plate 511 and the left and right fixed lids 514 are formed. It is preferable to disperse the electric wires front and back (see FIG. 31B).

In the assembling work of the present embodiment, a dedicated jig (rod-shaped, string-shaped, or dedicated special-shaped jig) is inserted through the jig hole 514e, so that the left and right fixed lids 514 are adjusted while adjusting the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1. It can be attached to the U-shaped metal plate 511. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of the process of assembling the plurality of electric wires forming the electric wiring DK1 in a distributed manner.

When the guide member 516 is fastened and fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511, the guide member 516 is assembled to the U-shaped metal plate 511 while pulling the electric wiring DK1 downward so that the electric wiring DK1 naturally moves to the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b. It is configured so as to be pulled inward (see FIG. 31(c)). This can reduce the difficulty of the process of assembling the electric wiring DK1 while arranging the electric wiring DK1 at an appropriate position.

It should be noted that when the rotary unit 500 integrally assembled by the above procedure is assembled to the supporting means 410, the other end side of the electric wiring DK1 is exposed downward through the deformed hole 413. A spiral tube is wound around the electrical wiring DK1 that is exposed below the odd-shaped hole 413.

The structure of the first operation unit 400 except the wiring assisting means 460 of the combined operation unit 402 can be assembled separately from the rotation unit 500, so that the rotation unit 500 is integrally assembled before assembly. After fixing the rotating unit 500 to the supporting means 410 in this state, the other end of the electric wiring DK1 is fixedly arranged.

That is, the electric wiring DK1 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band that is inserted into the forming portion 411a of the supporting means 410, and is fixed to the lower extension portion 519 of the guide member 516 by the same method, and the electric wiring DK1 is fixed. It is passed under the support pillar portion 464 and fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band inserted into the wiring support portion 465, and is passed through the opening 442e of the divided base member 442 to the back side (see FIG. 23).

By fastening and fixing the left side member 461 to the split base member 442 in a state where the electric wiring DK1 is passed through the opening 442e, the electric wiring DK1 can be arranged in the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the left side member 461. .. According to this assembling method, as compared with the case where the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 is determined in the state where the left side member 461 is fixed to the split base member 442, the electric wiring DK1 is provided in a gap narrower than the size of the connector at the tip of the electric wiring DK1. Can be arranged, so that the gap between the partition plate portion 442a and the left side member 461 can be designed to be narrow.

Then, the right side member 468 is fastened and fixed to the left side member 461, whereby the assembly of the combined operation unit 402 of the first operation unit 400 can be completed. As described above, according to the present embodiment in which the wiring assisting means 460 is not integrally formed but is separately formed by the left side member 461 and the right side member 468, the electric wiring DK1 is disposed inside the wiring assisting means 460. The workability of the work to be performed can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32(b), FIG. 32(c), FIG. 33(b), FIG. 33(c), FIG. 34(b) and FIG. 34(c), the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the electric wiring The relationship between the DK1, the supporting means 410 that supports the electric wiring DK1, and the guide member 516 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 32B, when the rotating unit 500 is in the lowered position, the front hanging portion 414 of the supporting means 410 abuts on and is supported by the upper end portion of the left member 461 of the wiring assisting means 460. That is, the wiring assisting means 460 also functions as a means for supporting the rotating unit 500.

In other words, while adopting a configuration in which only the left side portion of the rotary unit 500 is supported by the laminating means 420 and the guide means 430 (see FIG. 23), the left and right sides of the rotary unit 500 are limited only when the rotary unit 500 is in the lowered position. The rotating unit 500 can be supported on both sides.

Accordingly, the upper limit value of the rotation speed of the rotating body 560 when the wobble of the rotation unit 500 is within the allowable range is set in another state (for example, when the rotation unit 500 is in the lower position) while the rotation unit 500 is in the lowered position. It can be raised as compared with the state in which it is arranged in the raised position).

As shown in FIG. 32C, in the lowered position of the rotation unit 500, the lower end of the front hanging part 414 contacts the front upper end of the strip-shaped extending part 463 of the wiring auxiliary means 460. This makes it possible to shield the opening above the wiring assisting means 460 from the player's line of sight (looking down obliquely downward). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the electric wiring DK1 housed in the wiring auxiliary means 460 when the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position.

The electric wiring DK1 is fixed to the forming portion 411a (see FIG. 23) with a fixing member such as a binding band, fixed below the lower end portion of the lower extending portion 519 with a fixing member such as a binding band, and hangs downward. The portion is supported (stored) inside the wiring assisting means 460.

The length of the electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 32(c)) housed inside the wiring assisting means 460 is the same as that of the strip-shaped extending portion 463 and the supporting pillar portion 464 in the state where the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the raised position. It is designed to have a length such that a portion arranged between them floats (see FIG. 34(c)).

Further, the shape of the strip-shaped extending portion 463 is designed such that the electric wiring DK1 arranged in a substantially arc shape on the front side of the functional curved surface 463a reaches the lower extending portion 519 without excessive looseness. (See FIG. 32(a)).

Thus, by designing the electric wiring DK1 with a sufficient length so that the electric wiring DK1 is not overloaded, the electric wiring DK1 can be arranged inside the wiring auxiliary means 460 with a margin. Further, since the electric wiring DK1 reaches the lower extension portion 519 without excessive looseness, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK1 from being sandwiched between the strip-shaped extension portion 463 and the front hanging portion 414. be able to.

The spiral tube (not shown) wound around the electric wiring DK1 is made of a flexible silicone resin, but has a slightly higher rigidity than the electric wiring due to its shape. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the variation in the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 due to the vertical movement of the rotary unit 500.

Further, since the electric wire DK1 can be supported by the rigidity of the spiral tube (the electric wire DK1 can be supported by the spiral tube), the electric wire DK1 is hung on the wire supporting portion 465 and the lower extending portion 519. Even in the state in which the electric wiring DK1 is kept, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK1 from hanging down by its own weight, and thus it is possible to stabilize the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1.

The electric wiring DK1 supported inside the wiring assisting means 460 is fixed to the wiring supporting portion 465 with a fixing member such as a binding band, and passes backward between the left side member 461 and the partition plate portion 442a and is guided backward from the opening 442e. (See FIG. 23). That is, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is supported and hung by the lower extending portion 519 and the wiring supporting portion 465.

Of the lower extension portion 519 and the wiring support portion 465, the wiring support portion 465 is fixed, and the lower extension portion 519 is configured to be movable up and down. The lower extension portion 519 side (front side) is Since the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 is likely to vary, the lower extension portion 519 side (front side) is configured to be able to secure a larger space above the strip-shaped extension portion 463.

Specifically, the electric wiring DK1 is arranged by lowering the shape on the front side to the lower side as compared with the shape on the back side and forming an arc shape whose center is inside (above) the wiring assisting means 460. Large space is secured.

As shown in FIG. 33B, the rotating arm member 453 is arranged on the left side of the combined operation unit 402, the electric wiring DK1 is arranged on the right side of the combined operation unit 402, and the arrangement range of each is the partition plate portion 442a. It is divided by.

Here, the partition plate portion 442a is an essential component as a portion that supports the drive motor 441 and the transmission means 450. That is, since the arrangement range of the rotating arm member 453 and the electric wiring DK1 can be divided without adding a dedicated member, the rotating arm member 453 and the electric wiring DK1 can be cut while reducing the material cost. Interference can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 34C, at the raised position of the rotation unit 500, the extending arm portion 453b of the rotating arm member 453 extends in the vertical direction starting from the rotation axis, so that the through-hole 416a extends. Crosses the long direction (front-back direction) at right angles in the left-right direction. In other words, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 453 and the center of the connecting member 454 is the vertical direction, and intersects at right angles in the left-right direction with respect to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) of the through-slot 416a. To do.

As a result, the own weight of the rotating unit 500 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 453, and it is possible to prevent the own weight from being loaded in the rotating direction of the rotating arm member 453 (so-called dead point). Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 441 is released in the state where the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, the vertical position of the rotary unit 500 can be maintained. As a result, the drive time of the drive motor 441 can be reduced, and heat generation can be suppressed easily.

The extending direction of the extending arm portion 453b of the rotating arm member 453 and the penetrating elongated hole 416a intersect at a right angle when viewed in the left-right direction, even when the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position. Yes (see FIG. 32(a)).

As a result, the upward load when the rotary unit 500 is bounded (rebounded) after being placed in the lowered position is directed toward the rotary shaft of the rotary arm member 453, and the load of the rotary arm member 453 is increased. Since it can be prevented from being loaded in the rotating direction (so-called dead point effect occurs), even when the rotating unit 500 is moved to the lowered position at a high speed, the bound displacement (bounce displacement) is caused. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of.

Therefore, it is possible to partially eliminate the generation of a load in the drive motor 441 for preventing the bounce displacement (bounce displacement), so that the drive time of the drive motor 441 can be reduced and the heat generation can be easily suppressed. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 34C, in the state where the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, the connecting member 454 of the rotating arm member 453 has a rear end portion of the through elongated hole 416a, that is, a rear side columnar member. It is arranged at a position overlapping 431 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the supporting force via the rotating arm member 453 is concentrated on the rear side of the supporting means 410, and wobble tends to occur on the supporting means 410 and the front side portion of the rotating unit 500.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side columnar member 431 is configured to support the laminating means 420 via the guide tubular portion 423 (see FIG. 23). As a result, the area (surface area) on which the columnar member 431 supports the laminating means 420 can be increased, so that wobbling of the laminating means 420, the supporting means 410, and the front side portion of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

The displacement of the electric wiring DK1 when the rotary unit 500 moves from the raised position to the lowered position will be described. As shown in FIG. 34C, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided from the lower side of the support column portion 464 to the upper side through the front side and is fixed to the lower extending portion 519.

As shown in FIG. 34( c ), the lower extension portion 519 is arranged on the front side of the support column portion 464, so that the portion (excess portion) hanging from the lower extension portion 519 of the electric wiring DK1 is It is arranged on the front side of the support pillar portion 464.

The extra portion of the electrical wiring DK1 is vertically displaced as the lower extension portion 519 moves vertically. For example, when the lower extension portion 519 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 34(c), the excess portion of the electric wiring DK1 also lowers and starts contacting the functional curved surface 463a of the strip-shaped extension portion 463 ( See FIG. 33(c).

As the lower extending portion 519 is closer to the lower position of the rotary unit 500, the length of the electric wiring DK1 accommodated in the wiring auxiliary means 460 increases, and the diameter of the arc formed by the electric wiring DK1 increases. ..

In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced to the front side by the load received from the functional curved surface 463a, but as a countermeasure against this, the region on the upper side of the strip-shaped extending portion 463 is in front of the rear side. Since it is configured to be larger on the side, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the strip-shaped extending portion 463 to the electric wiring DK1.

In addition, the electric wiring DK1 near the functional curved surface 463a (the electric wiring DK1 near the bottom of the wiring auxiliary means 460) to which a load is applied by the contact between the electric wiring DK1 and the functional curved surface 463a is moved toward the front side, Before the contact with the surface 463a, the electric wiring DK1 is configured to hang down from the lower extension portion 519 arranged at a position far from the front end of the wiring auxiliary means 460, so that the electric wiring DK1 is connected. It is possible to prevent the front end from protruding to the front side.

Thus, as in the present embodiment, the front hanging portion 414 and the wiring assisting means 460 are in contact with each other (the opening of the wiring assisting means 460 is partially closed) when the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position. While adopting (see FIG. 32(c)), it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK1 from being sandwiched by the abutting portion (closed portion).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the functional bending portion 463a is configured as the inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, so that the main displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK1 is the front-back direction. Can be planned. As a result, an appropriate shape of the wiring assisting means 460 is selected from a shape in which the width of the electric wiring DK1 in which the displacement is unlikely to occur is short (narrow) and the width of the electric wiring DK1 in which the displacement is likely to occur is long (wide) is wide (wide). can do.

By partially limiting the direction of displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 and making it possible to select a shape with a small horizontal width as the shape of the wiring auxiliary means 460, the horizontal width of the combined operation unit 402 can be suppressed.

Therefore, even in the configuration in which the plurality of composite operation units 402 are arranged side by side (see FIG. 19) as in the present embodiment, the shape of the wiring assisting means 460 having a supplementary role of accommodating the electrical wiring DK1 is limited. As a result, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rotary unit 500 that plays a leading role as a production device and is visually recognized by the player.

With respect to the positional deviation of the electric wiring DK1 in the left-right direction, firstly, a gap is secured between the left and right upper ends of the wiring auxiliary means 460 and the supporting means 410 (see FIG. 32(c)). It is possible to avoid applying a sandwiching load to the electrical wiring DK1.

Secondly, the facing plate 462 is provided with an inclined portion 462a at the upper end of the facing plate 462, which is inclined in a direction away from the right side member 468 toward the upper side. By providing the inclined portion 468a inclined in the direction away from the electric wiring DK1, the electric wiring DK1 is configured to be easily slipped into the wiring auxiliary means 460.

That is, since the inclined portions 462a and 468a are formed in a reverse inverted V shape in a front view in which the opening width increases as they approach the side where the electric wiring DK1 is welcomed, when the electric wiring DK1 is displaced in either the left or right direction. However, it is possible to easily guide the electric wiring DK1 into the wiring auxiliary means 460. As a result, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring DK1 is caught by the upper edge portion of the wiring auxiliary means 460, is not guided by the wiring auxiliary means 460, and is caught between the supporting means 410 and the wiring auxiliary means 460. can do.

Thirdly, it is designed so that the left and right positions of the wiring support portion 465 and the lower extension portion 519 for fixing the electric wiring DK1 to be suspended are aligned with each other (see FIGS. 33(b) and 34(b)). .. That is, by disposing the position for fixing the electric wiring DK1 on the same plane orthogonal to the left-right direction, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the electric wiring DK1 in the left-right direction due to the vertical displacement of the rotary unit 500.

An example of a motion effect using the first motion unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. 35(a), FIG. 35(b), FIG. 35(c), FIG. 35(d), FIG. 35(e) and FIG. 35(f) show the third symbol display device 81 and the first operation unit 400. It is a front view of the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 1st operation unit 400 which are shown typically.

In FIG. 35(a), FIG. 35(b), FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 35(d), an example of changes of the first operation unit 400 during the game is shown in time series, and FIG. In FIG. 35(f), an example of an effect in which a plurality of rotating units 500 are interlocked to perform notification of different contents is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the turning-on or turning-off of the rotation unit 500 is controlled so as to correspond to the number of balls to be held, which changes due to a ball entering the first winning opening 64 (or the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67). That is, each time a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (or the second winning opening 640, the through gate 67) before the currently continuing fluctuations stop (every time the number of reserved balls increases), the left end The rotating unit 500 is sequentially turned on (the LED member 544 is turned on). That is, FIG. 35A illustrates a state in which the number of reserved balls is three.

The light emission color of the rotation unit 500 can be changed according to the light emission color of the LED member 544. Depending on the difference in the light emission color, the corresponding jackpot expectation (or the jackpot expectation, the hit expectation, the player's expectation) can be changed. The difference in the expected degree of profit obtained) may be notified.

The plurality of LED members 544 are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emission colors, it is possible to execute the emission effect of a plurality of colors with a small number of LEDs.

When the ongoing fluctuations stop, the leftmost rotary unit 500 is turned off (see FIG. 35(b)), and the correspondence of the hold display is shifted to the left one by one (see FIG. 35(c)).

Since the rotation unit 500 can be displaced between the raised position and the lowered position as described above, as shown in FIG. 35(b), a state in which a part of the third symbol display device 81 is hidden in the raised position. Can be controlled to rotate.

As a result, the attention of the rotary unit 500 can be improved. In addition, the decorative pattern arranged on the front side of the rotation unit 500 and the corresponding large or small measure of the expectation degree of the big hit (or the expectation degree of the small hit, the expectation degree of the hit, the expectation degree of the profit obtained by the player). By controlling in association with each other, attention to the rotary unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in FIG. 35B, the third rotation unit 500 from the left is lifted and rotated, and then the surface component member 560b is arranged on the front side, so that the player can see the decorative pattern of “?”. To be done. Thereby, the player is notified that the expectation level of fluctuation (or expectation degree of small hit, expectation degree of hit, expectation degree of profit obtained by the player) is unknown, and attracts the interest of the player. be able to.

The mode of attracting interest is not limited to this. For example, the rotation member 560 may continue to rotate, or the LED member 544 may blink at high speed.

After that, as a result of the correspondence of the pending display being shifted to the left one by one, the surface forming member 560a is arranged on the front side in the second rotation unit 500 from the left, so that the player visually recognizes the decorative pattern of “Δ”. To be done. Control so that the decorative pattern of “△” has a higher expectation of big hits (or expectation of small hits, expectation of hits, expectation of profits to be obtained by the player) than that of “○” In this case, the attention to the fluctuation corresponding to the second rotation unit 500 from the left can be improved.

In addition, the notification of the jackpot expectation (or expectation of small hit, expectation of hit, expectation of profit obtained by the player) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the number of reserved balls. It may be executed by changing the color or the form. Moreover, you may control so that the hold display displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the state of the rotation unit 500 may be matched. Further, an effect may be adopted in which a time difference is provided between the change in the hold display and the change in the state of the rotary unit 500.

As shown in FIG. 35(c), as a result of the correspondence of the hold display being shifted to the left one by one, the third rotation unit 500 from the left is turned off and is displaced to the lowered position. By this displacement, the hidden area of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible, but by drawing a display (for example, a display showing "coins") that raises the expectation of the player in this area, rotation It is possible to improve the attention to the third symbol display device 81 after the unit 300 is displaced to the lowered position.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, not only the player's attention is improved by controlling the rotating unit 500 in association with the variation of the symbol and the number of reserved balls, but also the third symbol display device 81 By configuring so that the display area can be partially hidden, it can function as a blindfold when changing the display of the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, as a supplementary effect of improving the attention to the rotation unit 500 that partially hides the third symbol display device 81, the attention is paid to the rotation unit 500 arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. From the state (see FIG. 35(b)), by retracting the rotary unit 500 (see FIG. 35(c)), it is possible to leave the line of sight of the player facing the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81, so that the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

From the state shown in FIG. 35(c), the correspondence of the hold display is shifted to the left by two, and when the variation corresponding to the hold for which the decorative pattern of “Δ” is shown in FIG. 35(c) is a big hit. Is arranged by placing a plurality of rotating bodies 560 in the raised position and arranging the surface constituting member 560c on the front side until the fluctuation stops, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the player visually recognize a row (a character string such as a jackpot that reminds the player to change to a state in which some benefit is obtained).

In this case, it is preferable to turn on the LED member 544 regardless of the number of reserved balls. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be made to shine brightly, and an effect that stirs the player's expectation can be executed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure an effect of visually recognizing the plurality of rotating bodies 560 alone and an effect of visually recognizing the plurality of rotating bodies 560 collectively. Here, the effect of collectively visualizing the plurality of rotating bodies 560 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 35D, and various modes are exemplified.

For example, as shown in FIG. 35(e), by arranging the third rotating body 560 from the left in the descending position and arranging the remaining rotating bodies 560 in the ascending position, the character string "HI!" It is possible for the player to visually recognize a character string) that reminds me.

By controlling the state shown in FIG. 35(e) so as to occur periodically in the standby state before the player starts the game, the player's interest can be attracted.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35(f), if the surface constituting member 560b only faces the front side of the rotary body 560 at the right end, the character string "HIT?" can be visually recognized by the player. ..

In this case, the player's interest can be drawn from the expectation that it will soon change to "HIT!". Moreover, you may direct like that. That is, from the state of FIG. 35(f), the right end rotary body 560 may be controlled to rotate, and the state may be changed to the state of FIG. 35(d).

FIGS. 36A and 36B are left side views of the detection sensor 547 and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right lid portion 570. FIG. 36A shows a state in which the detection sensor 547 is arranged at one end (the front end in FIG. 36A) of the non-formed range of the detected portion 577, and FIG. ), the state in which the detection sensor 547 is arranged at the end portion on the opposite side of the non-formed range of the detected portion 577 (the rear end portion in FIG. 36B) is illustrated.

The states shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) both show a rotation waiting state (stop state). That is, in FIG. 36A, the angle α1 of the non-formed range of the detected portion 577 from the time when the detected portion 577 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 during the rotation of the rotating body 560 (in the present embodiment, The state in which the drive motor 541 is stopped by rotating the drive motor 541 by half the angle (60 degrees) (30 degrees in the present embodiment) is illustrated. In FIG. 36(b), the rotating body 560 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view. The state in which the drive motor 541 is stopped immediately after the detected portion 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547 in this state is illustrated.

The angle difference between the states shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B depends on the angle of the non-formed portion of the detected portion 577. In the present embodiment, the detected portion 577 is formed such that the angle α1 of the non-formed portion is 60 degrees, and the angle difference between the states shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B is about 45 degrees. To be done.

This angular difference is designed in association with the direction of the player's line of sight that changes as the rotary unit 500 is displaced up and down. That is, when the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, the line of sight of the player looking at the rotating unit 500 is directed in a substantially horizontal direction, so that it is better to stop the rotating body 560 in the posture shown in FIG. 36(a). The decorative pattern of the body 560 can be easily shown, and the effect of the rotating body 560 can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position, the line of sight of the player looking at the rotating unit 500 is in the downward direction, so it is better to stop the rotating body 560 in the posture shown in FIG. 36(b). The decorative pattern of the rotating body 560 can be easily shown, and the effect of the rotating body 560 can be enhanced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by configuring a plurality of types of stop postures of the rotation unit 500 in relation to the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the rotation unit 500, whether the rotation unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, Regardless of whether it is arranged in the lowered position, it is possible to stop the rotating body 560 in such a posture that the decorative pattern of the rotating body 560 can be easily seen by the player.

Note that the correspondence relationship between the detection sensor 547 and the detected portion 577 differs between the state shown in FIG. 36(a) and the state shown in FIG. 36(b) because the rendering mode using the rotating body 560 (for example, This is due to the difference in the rotation speed of the rotating body 560.

That is, the state shown in FIG. 36(a) is the stop position when the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, but when the rotating unit 500 is arranged in the raised position, the player's attention is rotated. Since they are sufficiently gathered in the unit 500, the rotation speed of the rotating body 560 is slowed down and stopped slowly, so that the interest of the player can be improved over a long period of time.

For example, by gradually changing the state shown in FIG. 35(f) to the state shown in FIG. 35(d) by slowly rotating the rotating body 560, the period in which the player's expectations are increased is lengthened. Therefore, the attention of the rotating body 560 can be maintained. Therefore, even if the detection sensor 547 determines the position and then stops after rotating an angle (about 30 degrees in this embodiment) of a half of the non-formed range of the detected portion 577, the rotation of the rotating body 560. The possibility that the stop posture is shifted is low, and the rotating body 560 can be easily stopped in the posture shown in FIG.

According to this control mode, the rotary body 560 can be stopped in the posture shown in FIG. 36A in the same control mode regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary body 560. Therefore, the control mode of stopping after the forward rotation and the control mode of stopping after the reverse rotation can be selected depending on the case, so that it is difficult to predict the operation mode until the rotating body 560 is stopped. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

The state shown in FIG. 36(b) is the stop position when the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position, but when the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position, the player's attention is focused on the rotary unit 500. Since there are many cases where the rotation body 560 is not sufficiently gathered, it is easier to increase the interest of the player by increasing the rotation speed of the rotating body 560.

In the case of rotation at high speed, control is performed after the position is detected by the detection sensor 547 and then the rotation is stopped after rotating an angle (about 30 degrees in this embodiment) that is half the non-forming range of the detected portion 577. In this case, the stop position of the rotating body 560 may be displaced. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36B, by stopping the drive motor 541 immediately after the detected portion 577 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 547, the shift of the stop position of the rotating body 560 can be suppressed. ..

The rotation control of the rotation unit 500 is performed by rotating the rotation unit 500 at the rotation angles (90 degrees, 180 degrees, 270 degrees) set at 90 degree intervals from the above-described plurality of stop positions, and then stopping the rotation of the surface configuration member 560a. It is possible to stop in a posture in which any surface of ˜560d is made visible to the player.

As described above, the postures shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are designed to be adaptable to changes in the line of sight of the player, but the drive motor 541 (FIG. It is possible to avoid that the reference) is visually recognized by the player.

That is, since the drive motor 541 is arranged inside the rotating body 560, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the rotating body 560 regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight, and the drive motor 541 is visually recognized by the player. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, in the rotation unit 500, a configuration for detecting the angle of the rotating body 560 is arranged inside the rotating body 560. Therefore, it is possible to apply a decorative pattern to most of the outside of the rotating body 560, and it is possible to improve the effect of the rotating body 560.

In addition, a blindfold portion (a configuration for preventing the configuration for detecting the angle from being visually recognized) that may be necessary when the configuration for detecting the angle is arranged outside the rotating body 560. The rotary body 560 can be configured to be rotatable for one rotation or more while omitting the installation.

37 and 38 are front perspective views of the second operating unit 700, and FIGS. 39 and 40 are rear perspective views of the second operating unit 700. 37 and 39 show the standby state of the second operation unit 700 in which the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780 are arranged at the standby position (elevating end position), and in FIGS. 38 and 40, the displacement base member 720 is shown. And the state where the production means 780 is arranged at the projecting position (downward terminating position) projecting forward of the third symbol display device 81 is shown.

The second operation unit 700 has a feature that each movable portion is displaced so as to reduce the displacement amount of the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 guided to each movable portion for supplying electricity, and the coil spring SP1 can be seen from the front view. The spring cover SC1 is provided so as to be hidden so that the spring cover SC1 enters the inside of the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780, which will be described later in detail. The coil spring SP1 is schematically illustrated as a curved rectangular column.

41 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit 700. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of the fixed base member 701, the displacement base member 720, the driving means 730, the transmission means 740 and the urging means 750, and FIG. 44 is the fixed base member 701, the displacement base member 720, FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a driving unit 730, a transmission unit 740 and a biasing unit 750. That is, a part of FIG. 41 is enlarged in FIG. 43, and a part of FIG. 42 is enlarged in FIG. 44.

45 is an exploded front perspective view of the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R and the connecting means 770, and FIG. 46 is an exploded rear perspective view of the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R and the connecting means 770. That is, a part of FIG. 41 is enlarged in FIG. 45, and a part of FIG. 42 is enlarged in FIG. 46.

Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rendering means 780, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering means 780. That is, a part of FIG. 41 is enlarged in FIG. 47, and a part of FIG. 42 is enlarged in FIG. 48.

Further, FIG. 49 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 in a plane extending in the horizontal direction through the columnar fastening portion 705c of the supporting means 705. 41 to 49, reference is made to FIGS. 37 to 40 as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, the second operation unit 700 is disposed on the left and right elongated fixed base members 701 that are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, and on the front side of the base members 701. The displacement base member 720 is configured to be vertically displaceable with respect to the fixed base member 701, the driving means 730 for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement base member 720, and the driving means 730. A transmission means 740 configured to be able to transmit the driving force to the displacement base member 720, an urging means 750 for imparting an upward urging force to the displacement base member 720, and a pair of left and right ends disposed on the displacement base member 720 (left and right). The end portions on the center side) are rotatably rotatably supported, and the rotatably supported means 760L, 760R, the other ends (left and right outer ends) of the rotatably supported means 760L, 760R, and the left and right end portions of the fixed base member 701. A pair of connecting means 770 for connecting and, and a rendering means 780 fastened and fixed to the front side of the displacement base member 720 for the purpose of decoration in a front view are mainly provided.

The fixed base member 701 is made of a synthetic resin material, and has a main body plate portion 702 formed in a left and right long plate shape, and a rod-like projection of the same length from the main body plate portion 702 to the front side. A plurality of cover support protrusions 703 formed at the tip so that the spring cover SC1 can be fastened and fixed; a spring support portion 704 extending from the body plate portion 702 to the front side above the cover support protrusion 703 at the left end; A support means 705 that supports gear members such as a transmission gear 734 and a terminal gear 745 for transmitting a driving force, and a portion that pivotally supports the rotating arm member 743 of the transmission means 740, which is substantially circular in a front view and extends to the front side. A circular projecting portion 708 to be extended, a metal slide rail 711 to which a plate on the rear side is fixed to the left and right central portions of the main body plate portion 702 in a posture capable of sliding displacement in the vertical direction, and a raised portion to the front side of the circular projecting portion 708. From the above position, and a pair of left and right upper stoppers 717 that are juxtaposed in a cylindrical shape in a front view, and a pair of left and right ends that are juxtaposed to the tubular overhang 714 above the tubular overhang 714. And a pair of left and right lower end stoppers 719 formed to have a flat surface along the radial direction of the tubular overhang 714 at the rear side of the front-rear position that pivotally supports the connecting means 770 of the tubular overhang 714. It mainly comprises and.

The supporting means 705 has a columnar fastening portion 705 a protruding from the plate rear surface of the fixed base member 701 in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly shorter than the opening of the transmission gear 734, and a female screw formed at the tip portion thereof, and the fixed base member 701. An annular recessed portion 705b that is recessed in a double annular shape from the front surface of the plate, and a cylindrical shape that projects from the plate front surface of the fixed base member 701 at the center position of the annular recessed portion 705b and has a female screw at the tip end. Columnar fastening portion 705c, a plurality of protrusions 705d formed as protrusions extending in the front-rear direction on the side surface of the annular recessed portion 705b, and the outermost inner peripheral surface of the annular recessed portion 705b. And an engagement opening 705e formed in the main part.

The annular recessed portion 705b is formed with a diameter and a width that allow the annular portion of the terminal gear 745 (the annular portion having a gear formed on the outer periphery) to be arranged. The terminal gear 745 is rotatably supported by being screwed into the columnar fastening portion 705c with a fastening screw that is inserted into an opening formed at the center of the terminal gear 745.

The ridges 705d are arranged at eight locations at intervals of 45 degrees, and are formed in such a height that the tip can abut the inner circumference of the annular portion of the terminal gear 745. As a result, as compared with the case where the circles are fitted to each other, while maintaining the function of stabilizing the rotation shaft of the end gear 745 (stable axial support state), the annular portion and the annular recessed portion of the end gear 745 are maintained. The contact area with 705b can be reduced. Thereby, the driving force required to rotate the terminal gear 745 can be reduced.

The meshing opening 705e is formed so as to extend over the inner circumference of the annular recessed portion 705b and the rear bottom surface. As for the bottom portion on the rear surface side, at least an opening is formed at a position overlapping a circle centered on the columnar fastening portion 705a (circle having the outermost diameter of the transmission gear 734) in the rear view. As a result, the transmission gear 734 can be pivotally supported by the columnar fastening portion 705a in a state of being projected to the inner side of the meshing opening 705e (the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b).

In the present embodiment, the gear tooth portion of the transmission gear 734, which extends through the meshing opening 705e and projects toward the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b, is configured to mesh with the gear tooth portion of the terminal gear 745. Thereby, the transmission gear 734 is attached to the fixed base member 701 from the back side and is axially supported, while the terminal gear 745 is attached to the fixed base member 701 from the front side and is axially supported, The driving force can be transmitted by meshing transmission between the transmission gear 734 and the terminal gear 745.

The meshing opening 705e is formed only in a portion necessary for projecting the transmission gear 734 to the inner diameter side of the annular recessed portion 705b, and no opening is formed in other portions. This can prevent the strength of the fixed base member 701 near the supporting means 705 from being excessively insufficient.

The circular projecting portion 708 includes a plurality of positioning projecting pins 709 projecting from the front end surface, and a plurality of projecting ridges 710 projecting radially outward over the projecting length.

The ridge 710 is arranged between the rotating arm member 743 and the circular overhanging portion 708, and functions to suppress the contact area between the rotating arm member 743 and the circular overhanging portion 708. In this case, the frictional resistance of the shaft supporting portion, which tends to be a problem when the circular overhanging portion 708 has a large diameter, can be reduced, so that the rotation arm member 743 can be rotated while stabilizing the shaft supporting state. It is possible to reduce the frictional resistance caused by the displacement of the moving arm member 743. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force required to displace the second operation unit 700.

The metal slide rail 711 has a plurality of metal plates stacked in front and back, and the metal plate at the front end is connected and fixed to the displacement base member 720. That is, the displacement base member 720 is guided by the metal slide rail 711 so as to be displaced in the vertical direction.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is a portion that rotatably supports the connecting means 770 by forming the outer peripheral shape into a circular shape in a front view, and has an opening 714a penetrating in the front-rear direction and a front side end to the front side. A plurality of positioning projection pins 715 that project from the front side and a plurality of fastening portions 716 that are formed with female threads at the front end at a portion where the projection pins 715 do not project.

The opening 714a serves as a passage for the electric wiring DK2. That is, the electric wiring DK2 is guided to the front side through the opening 714a, and is fixed by fastening a wiring fastening member such as a binding band to the fixing shape portion 718 at the front end portions of the left and right upper stoppers 717. ..

In the present embodiment, among the left and right upper stoppers 717, a fixing shape portion 718 having a shape through which a binding band can be passed is formed so as to extend from the front end surface of the left upper left and right stoppers 717. The fixing shape portion 718 is not formed on the right and left upper stoppers 717.

As described above, the fixing shape member 718 is formed only on the left side of the left and right upper stoppers 717 on which the electric wiring DK2 is guided, and the formation on the opposite side is omitted, thereby simplifying the shape of the fixing base member 701. Can be planned. Further, by not forming the fixing shape portion 718 at an unnecessary portion, the work efficiency of the assembling operator can be improved.

Since the openings 714a are arranged in a pair on the left and right, the electric wiring DK2 can be guided to the front side at both left and right ends, but in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is guided only through the left opening 714a. The electric wiring DK2 is not arranged in the opening 714a on the right side.

As a result, it is not necessary to design the right tubular overhang 714 and the right connecting means 770 pivotally supported by the right tubular overhang 714 in consideration of the relationship with the electrical wiring DK2. The degree of freedom in design of the configuration of the projecting portion 714, the connecting means 770 on the right side, and the periphery thereof can be improved.

Note that, regardless of this, the electric wiring DK2 may be passed through both of the pair of left and right openings 714a to the front side and guided to the left and right pivotally supported means 760L, 760R, respectively. In this case, since it is easy to make the load applied to the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R via the electrical wiring DK2 the same on the left and right, the displacement of the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R that is displaced by the displacement of the displacement base member 720 is left and right. It can be easily made symmetrical.

The projecting pin 715 and the fastening portion 716 are circles (circumscribing circles of the opening 714a) formed by connecting surfaces that form the shape of the opening 714a and on which neither the projecting pin 715 nor the fastening portion 716 is arranged. Is formed so as to project toward the center side of. That is, unlike the outer peripheral shape (circular shape), the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 has a shape in which a circle is recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of positions on the circumference.

Here, for example, when the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is a perfect circle, the durability of the electric wiring DK2 may be reduced. That is, since the electrical wiring DK2 inserted through the opening 714a is connected to the decorative board 764 of the supported means 760L, there is a possibility that it will be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the supported means 760L. If the degree of friction with the edge of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 is large, the coating of the electric wiring DK2 may be damaged early, or the electric wiring DK2 may be broken early.

As a countermeasure against this, a tubular intermediate member (color) capable of sliding between the tubular overhanging portion 714 and the electric wiring DK2 may be provided, or a separate covering member may be wound around the electric wiring DK2. However, the cost of the separate member will increase, resulting in an increase in product cost.

On the other hand, by making the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 714 a shape that is recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of points of a circle, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 that is easily displaced along the edge of the opening 714a Since it is possible to limit the positions at the protruding pins 715 and the fastening portions 716, it is possible to suppress the degree of rubbing of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the edge portion of the cylindrical overhang portion 714.

This improvement does not require a separate member and solves the problem simply by devising the inner peripheral shape of the opening 714a. Therefore, the durability of the electric wiring DK2 can be improved while suppressing an increase in product cost.

It should be noted that the free displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 can be limited by winding the spiral tube around the electrical wiring DK2, but in this case, the resistance of the displacement of the second operation unit 700 due to the rigidity of the spiral tube. May increase. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement resistance is reduced by omitting the disposition of the spiral tube, and the displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 is freely restricted by the change in the posture of the pivotally supported means 760 described later. There is.

The left and right upper stoppers 717 are configured to be capable of abutting on the lateral side surfaces of the connecting means 770 axially supported by the tubular projecting portion 714, and the abutting defines the upward displacement end of the connecting means 770. Thereby, the displacement angle of the connecting means 770 can be limited.

The left and right lower end stoppers 719 are configured to be capable of abutting on the rotation direction side surfaces of the arcuate projections 775 of the connecting means 770 axially supported by the cylindrical overhanging portion 714, and the abutting contact displaces the connecting means 770 in the downward direction. Specify the termination. Thereby, the displacement angle of the connecting means 770 can be limited.

As described above, the left and right upper stoppers 717 and the lower left and right stoppers 719 are configured to be able to contact the connecting means 770 in the rotation direction of the connecting means 770, but the front and rear positions of contact with the connecting means 770 are different. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load (fatigue) from accumulating at a specific position (front and rear position) of the connecting means 770, and to improve the durability of the connecting means 770.

The contact position corresponding to the displacement direction of the connecting means 770 can be selected according to the purpose. For example, in the present embodiment, the upward displacement is a displacement in which the rendering unit 780 is directed upward of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15), and at the end position of the upward displacement, the connecting unit 770 is the rear side of the game board 13. Since it is difficult to see it by the player (see FIG. 2), fine adjustment of the displacement end position is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to adopt the option of defining the displacement by bringing the connecting means 770 into contact with the outer shape portion whose design is difficult to change due to the strength and the structural relationship.

In addition, during the upward displacement, gravity moves in a direction to suppress the displacement of the connecting means 770, so that the displacement speed of the connecting means 770 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to adopt the option of abutting the thin portion of the connecting means 770 to define the displacement.

On the other hand, the descending displacement, on the contrary, is a displacement of the effect means 780 toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15), and the arrangement is determined by the connecting means 770 and the connecting means 770 at the end position of the descending displacement. Since the pivotal support means 760L and 760R are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and can be easily seen by the player (see FIG. 16), it is considered that fine adjustment of the displacement end position is necessary in the design and trial production stage. To be Therefore, it is better to adopt the option of abutting on the arcuate protrusion 775 whose design can be easily changed, rather than the outer shape, and defining the displacement, at the stage of design and trial production of the connecting means 770 and the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R. The design change required for fine adjustment of the displacement end position of can be minimized.

That is, by changing the shape and arrangement of the arcuate protrusion 775, the displacement end positions of the connecting means 770 and the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R can be changed.

In addition, at the time of descending displacement, gravity is directed in the same direction as the displacement of the connecting means 770, and there is also a possibility of adopting an effect of displacing the effecting means 780 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 at high speed. Since it is high, it is considered that the descending displacement of the connecting means 770 is likely to be high in speed and the load at the time of contact is large.

Therefore, since the connecting means 770 may be damaged when the thin portion is brought into contact, the arcuate protrusion 775 is configured to be long to secure a large contact area and to reduce the pressure applied to the connecting means 770. The durability of the connecting means 770 can be improved by adopting the option of trying.

As described above, also in the present embodiment, the contact positions of the connecting means 770 and the left and right upper stoppers 717 and the left and right lower stoppers 719 are set according to the purpose. Therefore, when the purpose of the second operation unit 700 with respect to the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the direction of displacement is changed, the contact position of the connecting means 770 and the options to be adopted are selected. Of course, it can change.

The displacement base member 720 is provided with a main body plate portion 721 to which the metal slide rail 711 is fastened and fixed on the rear surface side, a columnar projecting portion from the center of the main body plate portion 721 in the left-right direction to the front surface side, and a coil spring SP1 at the projecting tip. A projecting fastening portion 722 formed with a female screw into which a screw member for fixing the end portion of the main body plate portion 721 is formed, and a long opening 723 formed in the left half of the main body plate portion 721 in a left-right elongated shape. And a pair of tubular projecting portions 724 projecting from the body plate portion 721 to the front side in a tubular shape in a front view, and from the body plate portion 721 to the front side at a vertical position outside the tubular projecting portion 724 in the left-right direction. The upper and lower stoppers 727 projectingly provided to regulate the displacement angles of the pivotally supported means 760L and 760R, and the left and right pair formed in the lower half portion of the main body plate portion 721 are provided to avoid interference between the electric wiring DK3 and other components. And an interference avoidance configuration unit 728, which is one of the above.

The long opening 723 is an opening through which the connecting pillar portion 743b and the collar C1 of the transmission means 740 are inserted, and is formed with a width and a length that allow the connecting pillar portion 743b and the collar C1 to be displaced.

Similar to the tubular overhanging portion 714 described above with the fixed base member 701, the tubular overhanging portion 724 has an outer peripheral shape of a circular shape in a front view, so as to rotatably support the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R. The opening 724a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a plurality of position-adjusting projecting pins 725 projecting from the front end to the front side, and the projecting pin 725 not projecting In, a plurality of fastening portions 726 formed with female threads are provided at the front end.

The opening 724a serves as a passage for the electric wiring DK3. That is, the electrical wiring DK3 is guided in the front-rear direction through the opening 724a. The electric wiring DK3 is connected to the shaft-supported means 760L and 760R and the effect means fixed to the displacement base member 720, which will be described in detail later.

The projecting pin 725 and the fastening portion 726 are circles (circumscribing circles of the opening 724a) formed by connecting surfaces that form the shape of the opening 724a and on which neither the projecting pin 725 nor the fastening portion 726 is arranged. Is formed so as to project toward the center side of. That is, unlike the outer peripheral shape (circular shape), the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 has a shape in which a circle is recessed toward the central axis at a plurality of positions on the circumference.

Here, for example, when the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 is a perfect circle, the durability of the electric wiring DK3 may be reduced. That is, since the electrical wiring DK3 inserted through the opening 724a is connected to the decorative substrate 764 of the pivotally supported means 760L, there is a possibility that it will be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the pivotally supported means 760L. If the degree of friction with the edge of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 is large, the coating of the electric wiring DK3 may be damaged early, or the electric wiring DK3 may be broken early.

As a countermeasure against this, a tubular intermediate member (color) that can slide between the tubular overhang 724 and the electrical wiring DK3 may be provided, or a separate covering member may be wound around the electrical wiring DK3. However, the cost of the separate member will increase, resulting in an increase in product cost.

On the other hand, by making the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 concave toward the central axis at a plurality of points of the circle, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 that is easily displaced along the edge of the opening 724a It can be restricted at the location of the projecting pin 725 or the fastening portion 726. That is, the displacement of the electric wiring DK3 can be stopped by the protruding pin 725 and the fastening portion 726, and the displacement angle of the electric wiring DK3 can be limited to a small value. Therefore, the electric wiring DK3 with respect to the edge portion of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 can be suppressed. The degree of rubbing can be suppressed to a low level.

This improvement does not require a separate member and solves the problem by simply devising the inner peripheral shape of the opening 724a. Therefore, the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 can be improved while suppressing an increase in product cost.

The vertical stopper 727 is configured to be able to regulate the displacement of the shaft-supported means 760L and 760R, but when the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the end of the vertical displacement and is stopped, either the vertical stopper 727 or vertical Does not necessarily come into contact with the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the ascending end position, the lower stopper and the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R are configured to contact each other (the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R). Even if the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the descending end position of the rotation lower end position), the upper stopper is provided so as to form a gap between the displacement base member 720 and the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R.

As a result, when the displacement base member 720 is displaced at a high speed toward the descending end position, the displacement base member 720 reaches the descending end position even if the pivotally supported means 760L and 760R are displaced at high speed in conjunction with each other. At this time, the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R and the upper and lower stoppers 727 do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, compared with the case where the upper stopper is provided without a gap between the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R, It is possible to reduce the load applied to the upper and lower stoppers 727 from the shaft supporting means 760L and 760R.

In the present embodiment, the rotation ends of the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R are defined by the relationship with the connecting means 770 (see FIG. 54), and the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R are arranged at the rotation upper end position. However, the upper and lower stoppers 727 are formed so that a slight gap is formed between the shaft supporting means 760L, 760R and the upper stopper.

The upper and lower stoppers 727 are arranged vertically in a thin plate shape so as to correspond to the cylindrical protruding portions 724. As a result, a slight flexural deformation can be generated when the bearings 760L and 760R are brought into contact with each other, so that the load applied to the bearings 760L and 760R can be partially offset during the contact. As a result, damage to the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R can be prevented.

In particular, the lower stopper is likely to receive a load for a long time due to its own weight of the shaft-supported means 760L and 760R. Therefore, in the configuration that allows the flexural deformation as described above, the flexurally deformed state continues for a long time. However, there is a possibility that the shape is fixed while being flexibly deformed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the opposite side of the contact surface of the lower stopper, a protruding portion 727a that is protruded to the front side like the upper and lower stoppers 727 is disposed so as to be opposed to the lower stopper. .. Since the lower stopper and the projecting portion 727a are connected at both upper and lower end portions of the surfaces facing each other, the deformation of the lower stopper is received by the projecting portion 727a.

As a result, the degree of flexural deformation of the upper and lower stoppers 727 can be adjusted. That is, since the protruding portion 727a receives a load (a resistance is generated), the degree of bending deformation of the lower stopper can be made smaller than that of the upper stopper. As a result, even if a load is generated for a long time due to the weight of the pivotally supported means 760L, 760R, the amount of flexural deformation of the lower stopper can be suppressed to a small amount, and the shape may be fixed while being flexibly deformed. Can be lowered.

In the above description, a simple method of adjusting the flexural deformation amount of the stopper while keeping the resin moldability high by making the thicknesses of the upper and lower stoppers 727 (thicknesses of the shaft-supported means 760L, 760R in the rotation direction) equal in the upper and lower directions. However, the method of adjusting the flexural deformation amount of the stopper is not limited to this, and various methods are exemplified. For example, a flexible (highly deformable) cushion member may be provided, or the stopper may be displaceably supported by the main body plate portion 721.

The interference avoiding component 728 is formed so as to connect a long opening 728 a formed in the main body plate 721 with a left-right elongated shape and the upper and lower edges of the left-right center position of the elongated opening 728, and has a central portion. A U-shaped projecting portion 728b having a U-shape in a side view, which projects to the front side. The long opening 728 is an opening that allows the electric wiring DK3 to pass therethrough, and the U-shaped overhanging portion 728b is formed for the purpose of supporting the electric wiring DK3, which will be described later in detail.

The drive means 730 is a drive motor 731 that can be rotationally driven in both forward and reverse directions, a support plate 732 to which a motor case of the drive motor 731 is fastened and fixed, and a drive that penetrates the support plate 732 and is inserted to the front side. It mainly includes a motor gear 733 which is inserted and fixed to the shaft, and a transmission gear 734 which is meshed with the motor gear 733 and is axially supported by the columnar fastening portion 705a of the support means 705 of the fixed base member 701.

The support plate 732 is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 702 from the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 39 ), and in this assembled state, the transmission gear 734 of the transmission gear 734 is brought to a position where it can be seen from the front through the meshing opening 705e of the supporting means 705. Some of the teeth are arranged so as to be able to project, and the teeth and the end gear 745 mesh with each other, whereby the driving force generated by the drive motor 731 can be transmitted to the transmission means 740.

The transmission means 740 is fastened and fixed to the front end face of the circular overhanging portion 708 in a state of being aligned with the ring member 741 which is fitted on the circular overhanging portion 708 with a gap therebetween and the projecting pin 709. The lid member 742, a rotating arm member 743 disposed between the front lid member 742 and the ring member 741 and having the base end side opening 743a pivotally supported by the circular protrusion 708, and the rotating arm member 743 are long. A transmission hole 744 bored in an elongated shape, a terminal gear 745 rotatably supported by the annular recessed portion 705b and the columnar fastening portion 705c of the supporting means 705, and a rotation axis from the eccentric position of the terminal gear 745. An eccentric column portion 746 protruding in parallel with the transmission hole 744 and a rotational position of the terminating gear 745 (the terminating gear 745 is in the initial arrangement), which is a photocoupler type detecting device, and is a main body. A detection sensor 747 fixed to the plate portion 702 is mainly provided.

The ring member 741 is a member for reducing friction, and suppresses an increase in frictional resistance by sliding between the rotating arm member 743 and the main body plate portion 702, so that the rotating arm member 743 operates smoothly. I am trying to become.

In addition, since the circular protrusion 708 on which the ring member 741 is supported reduces friction in the rotational direction of the ring member 741 by the protrusions 710, the ring member 741 can be easily slid.

Similarly to the ring member 741, the base end side opening 743a of the rotating arm member 743 is rotatably fitted and supported in the range where the protrusion 710 of the circular overhanging portion 708 is formed. It is possible to reduce not only the friction of the ring member 741 in the rotation direction, but also the friction of the rotation arm member 743 in the rotation direction.

The rotating arm member 743 includes a connecting column portion 743b that is provided in a columnar shape so as to project from the rotation tip side to the front side. The connecting pillar portion 743b is inserted into the elongated opening 723 of the displacement base member 720, and the driving force is transmitted to the displacement base member 720 via the connecting pillar portion 743b.

A collar C1 which is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a tubular shape is disposed in the connecting column portion 743b, and a female screw formed at the tip of the connecting column portion 743b is screwed with a flanged screw. As a result, the collar C1 is prevented from coming off by the flange of the screw.

The rotary arm 743 has a recessed recess formed in the upper side of the transmission hole 744 from the rear side toward the front side (see FIG. 44 ). The recessed escape portion is an escape shape portion for avoiding interference with the detection sensor 747 when the rotating arm 743 is arranged at the rising end position (see FIG. 50). As a result, the outer shape of the rotating arm 743 is expanded to a position where it interferes with the detecting sensor 747 in a front view, while avoiding that the arrangement of the rotating arm 743 is restricted by the detecting sensor 747 (the rotating arm 743 is widened. Can be formed).

The transmission hole 744 is formed as a long hole extending along the linear direction in most of the part, but is provided with a curved shape portion 744a capable of guiding the eccentric column portion 746 at the rotation proximal end side end portion of the rotating arm member 743. .. The relationship between the curved shape portion 744a and the eccentric column portion 746 and the effect of the curved shape portion 744a will be described later.

The terminal gear 745 meshes with the transmission gear 734 in the assembled state (see FIG. 39), and rotates in conjunction with the rotational drive of the drive motor 731. That is, the driving force of the drive motor 731 is transmitted in the order of the drive motor 731, the motor gear 733, the transmission gear 734, and the terminal gear 745, and is further downstream from the terminal gear 745 to the rotating arm member 743 and the displacement base member 720. Is transmitted.

The eccentric column part 746 is provided with a collar C1 that is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a tubular shape, and a female screw formed at the tip of the eccentric column part 746 is screwed with a flanged screw. As a result, the collar C1 is prevented from coming off by the flange of the screw.

The detection sensor 747 has a detection groove oriented such that a detected portion 745a extending in a plate shape radially outward from the terminal gear 745 can be inserted, and the detected portion 745a is disposed in this detection groove. The arrangement of the terminal gear 745 is detected depending on whether or not there is.

The biasing means 750 includes a spring cover SC1 formed in a plate shape having an L shape in a front view, a coil spring SP1 arranged on the back side thereof, and a tubular cylinder with a flange arranged to bend the coil spring SP1. And a member 751.

The flanged tubular member 751 is a member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft portion SC1j that projects in a circular shape toward the back side of the spring cover SC1 and that functions as a fixed pulley. The coil spring SP1 is arranged so as to be curved in an arc shape. As a result, the coil spring SP1 can be expanded and contracted in a substantially L shape, so that the degree of freedom in adjusting the elastic force of the coil spring SP1 can be improved in a small range as compared with the case where the coil spring SP1 is linearly expanded and contracted. You can

The coil spring SP1 has an upper end supported by the spring support portion 704 of the fixed base member 701, and a lower end supported by a screw member screwed into the protruding fastening portion 722 of the displacement base member 720. .. That is, the biasing means 750 is arranged on the front side of the displacement base member 720.

Although the supported shafts 760L and 760R have slightly different external shapes, since the configurations relating to the functions are often symmetrical, one side (the left shafted support 760L) is also referred to as the supported shaft 760 and will be described in detail. However, the detailed description of the other (the right-side supported means 760R) will be omitted.

The shaft-supported means 760 has a thin-walled ring member 761 externally fitted to the tubular overhanging portion 724 and a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 726 in a state of being aligned with the projecting pin 725. The front lid member 762 that is fastened and fixed to the front end surface of the cylindrical overhanging portion 724 by this is disposed between the front lid member 762 and the thin ring member 761 and the circular overhanging portion 724 is opened at the proximal end side. A portion for guiding the driven displacement member 763 on which the 763a is axially supported, the electric decoration board 764 fastened and fixed to the front side of the driven displacement member 763, and the electric wiring DK2 connected to the electric decoration board 764. A guide portion 765 arranged on the rotation tip side of the driven displacement member 763, a columnar fastening portion 766 having a columnar projection on the rotation tip side to the back side and having a female screw formed on the tip side, and an illumination board. It mainly includes a diffusing member that is disposed on the front side of the 764 and that diffuses light, and a decorative member 768 in which a design member that constitutes a design in front view is stacked.

The thin plate ring member 761 is a member for reducing friction, and suppresses an increase in frictional resistance by sliding between the driven displacement member 763 and the main body plate portion 702 so that the driven displacement member 763 operates smoothly. I am trying to become.

The front lid member 762 includes an opening 762a for wiring through which is formed in a shape along the inner peripheral shape of the opening 724a. The electrical wiring DK3 is passed through the opening 762a in the front-rear direction, guided to the back side of the main body plate portion 721, and guided to the front side through the elongated opening 728a, which will be described later in detail.

The decorative board 764 is provided with connector portions 764a to which the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 are connected at both ends. Here, the supply of electricity related to the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 and the decorative substrate 764 will be described. First, the electric wiring DK2, which is position-fixed to the binding band passed through the fixing shape portion 718, is connected to the connector portion 764a arranged at the left end portion of the decorative board 764 of the pivotally supported means 760L.

One end of the electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connector portion 764a arranged at the right end portion of the left illuminated board 764, and the other end of the electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connection terminal 784 of the rendering means 780. The electric wiring DK3 is symmetrically arranged, and the right electric wiring DK3 is connected to the connector portion 764a arranged at the left end portion of the right decorative board 764 and the connection terminal 784 of the rendering means 780. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 are connected at the ends of the shaft-supported means 760, and the arrangement of the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 in the middle portion of the shaft-supported means 760 is omitted. There is. By allowing the decorative substrate 764 arranged in the omitted portion to play a role as an electric power supply unit of the electric wirings DK2 and DK3, the electric wiring DK2 can be minimized while the displacement range of the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 is minimized. , DK3, it is possible to secure a long path of electricity supplied.

In addition, the decorative board 783 of the rendering means 780 is guided by the guide portion 765 arranged at the left end portion of the left shaft-supported means 760L by causing it to play a role as the electricity supply means of the electric wiring DK3. Electricity can be supplied to the right shaft-supported means 760R via the electric wiring DK2.

This makes it possible to supply electricity to the rotatably supported means 760R without connecting electrical wiring to the rotatably supported means 760R from the right end portion. The degree of freedom in design of the configuration around the pivotally supported means 760R can be improved.

For example, when performing the displacement for lowering the supported shaft means 760 at high speed, it is necessary to consider not to leave the electrical wiring DK2 for the supported shaft means 760L, but for the supported shaft means 760R, Is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a displacement mode in which only the pivotally supported means 760R is lowered at a high speed.

Further, for example, it becomes easy to arrange a member between the right and left upper stoppers 717 and the pivotally supported means 760R. Accordingly, a member can be arranged on the front side of the connecting means 770 and the member can hide the connecting means 770.

The guide portion 765 has an opening 765a formed as an opening in which the connector portion 764a (see FIG. 46) of the decorative board 764 can be placed, and a front surface as a path capable of guiding the electric wiring DK2 toward the opening 765a. And a path portion 765b having an open side and a U-shaped cross section.

The cylindrical fastening portion 766 is provided with a collar C1 that is a member for reducing friction and is formed in a tubular shape. The collared screw C1 is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip end of the collar C1. The collar C1 prevents the collar C1 from coming off.

The difference between the right decorative board 764 and the (left) decorative board 764 is that there is no electrical wiring connection via the right end, so that the right decorative board 764 has a connector at the right end. No part is provided. Further, for the same reason, the guide portion 765 is not provided on the right driven displacement member 763.

Since the connecting means 770 is composed of left and right members having substantially the same shape, the configuration of the left connecting means 770 will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the right connecting means 770 will be omitted. The connecting means 770 has a thin-walled ring member 771 externally fitted to the tubular overhanging portion 714 with a gap and a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 716 in a state of being aligned with the projecting pin 715. As a result, a front lid member 772 that is fastened and fixed to the front end surface of the cylindrical overhang portion 714, and a circular opening portion 714 disposed between the front lid member 772 and the thin ring member 771 are provided with a base end side opening 773a. The driven displacement member 773 that is axially supported, the elongated opening 774 that is formed in a long shape along the radial direction of the driven displacement member 773, and the center of the opening 773a toward the rear side of the driven displacement member 773 are centered. It mainly includes an arcuate protrusion 775 protruding in an arcuate shape.

The thin plate ring member 771 is a member for reducing friction, and suppresses an increase in frictional resistance by sliding between the driven displacement member 773 and the raised portion from the main body plate portion 702, thereby reducing the friction of the driven displacement member 773. The operation is designed to be smooth.

The front lid member 772 is configured as a member having the same shape as the front lid member 762, and includes a wiring passage opening 772a formed in a shape along the inner peripheral shape of the opening 714a. The electric wiring DK2 is passed through the opening 772a in the front-rear direction, guided by the guide portion 765, and connected to the connector portion 764a of the decorative board 764.

The elongated opening 774 receives the cylindrical fastening portion 766 of the driven displacement member 763 from the front side, receives the collar C1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 766 from the back side, and is formed at the tip of the cylindrical fastening portion 766. The screw with the brim is screwed into the female screw. In this state, the collar C1 is prevented from coming off by the collar of the screw with a collar, so that the connecting means 770 is supported by the shaft-supported means 760 so as not to fall off.

The arcuate protrusion 775 is disposed so as to be capable of contacting the left and right lower stoppers 719, and this contact defines the rotational end of the connecting means 770, which will be described later in detail.

The production means 780 is fastened and fixed from the front side with a production base member 781 in which a plurality of legs 782 projecting to the back side are fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720, and a size that covers the outer shape of the production base member 781. And a lower shield member 788 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the lower half of the effect base member 781 to shield the line of sight from below.

The effect base member 781 has a disc-shaped main body plate portion 781a and a plurality of legs arranged toward the back side of the main body plate portion 781a with a gap slightly longer than the left and right width of the vertically long portion of the spring cover SC1. A portion 782, an electric circuit board 783 that has an LED (light emitting means) that emits light to the front side and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body plate section 781, and an electric circuit board disposed on the rear side of the electric circuit board 783. A plurality of connection terminals 784 configured to be connectable to the wiring DK3 and a plurality of insertion openings 785 formed in the main body plate portion 781a are provided.

The insertion opening 785 is a mounting opening 785a formed near the center of the main body plate portion 781a in a range including the connection terminal 784 in a rear view, and a pair of left and right openings formed outside the main body plate portion 781a. Opening 785b. The restriction opening 785b functions as an opening for restricting the arrangement of the electric wiring DK3, and details will be described later.

The decorative member 786 is configured by stacking a plurality of members. That is, a diffusing member that diffuses light and a design member that is made of a light-transmissive resin material and that forms a design shape in a front view are stacked. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect produced by the light emitted from the light emitting means of the illuminated substrate 783.

The lower shield member 788 is a member that shields the line of sight from the lower side (the line of sight when the player shifts his or her eyes so as to look up from the third symbol display device 81), and is of the second operation unit 700. The purpose is to prevent the biasing means 750 from being seen from the lower side in the standby state, which will be described later in detail.

50, 51 and 52 are front views of the second operation unit 700. 50, 51, and 52, the manner in which the displacement base member 720 of the second operation unit 700 is displaced from the ascending end position to the descending end position is illustrated in time series. Note that, in FIGS. 50, 51, and 52, the illustration of the electric circuit board 764, the decorative member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted for easy understanding.

50 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the rising end position, and FIG. 51 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at an intermediate position between the ascending end position and the descending end position. 52, the state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the descending end position is shown.

Note that FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the lower left and right end stoppers 719 and the arcuate convex portions 775 (see FIG. 46) of the connecting means 770 start contact. That is, among the intermediate positions, the end position of the section in which the posture of the driven displacement member 763 is maintained during the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720 is shown, and the displacement base member 720 descends beyond the state shown in FIG. With the displacement, the posture of the driven displacement member 763 changes (see FIG. 52).

When the terminating gear 745 rotates until the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the descending terminating position, the eccentric column portion 746 enters the curved shape portion 744 a of the transmission hole 744. The curved shape portion 744a is formed as an opening portion that curves along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the terminal gear 745 in the state of FIG. 52, and while the eccentric column portion 746 is advancing through the curved shape portion 744a. The posture of the rotating arm member 743 is maintained.

That is, if the curved portion 744a is used as a deceleration section until the termination gear 745 stops, even if the termination base gear 745 is rotated at high speed and the displacement base member 720 is vertically displaced at high speed, The displacement base member 720 can be prevented from being displaced during deceleration of the 745. Therefore, after performing the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720 at a high speed, the displacement base member 720 can be accurately stopped at the lower end position (it can be suddenly stopped).

Further, when the terminating gear 745 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state in which the displacement base member 720 is disposed at the descending end position, the curved shape portion 744a is rotated while the eccentric column portion 746 is advanced at the start of rotation. The posture of the moving arm member 743 is maintained and the resistance due to the weight of the rotating arm member 743 is not applied. Therefore, the magnitude required as the driving force at the start of driving of the drive motor 731 can be suppressed to be small.

The curved portion 744a is configured to have a length that restricts the eccentric column portion 746 from continuing to rotate clockwise in a front view. That is, the eccentric column portion 746 is located in a range near the rotation axis of the rotating arm member 743 among the positions where the eccentric column portion 746 can be displaced (the position on the circumference around the rotation axis of the terminal gear 745). Is arranged, the eccentric column portion 746 is formed with a length that cannot be included inside.

As a result, even if the terminal gear 745 cannot be fully decelerated and further rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 52, the eccentric column portion 746 and the curved shape portion 744a are locked, and the rotating arm member. It is possible to prevent upward displacement of the 743.

The electrical wiring DK2 guided to the front side through the upper left corner of the opening 772a of the front lid member 772 disposed on the front side of the left opening 714a is connected to the fixing shape portion 718 of the left and right upper stoppers 717 with a binding band or the like. The fixing shape portion 718 is used as a starting point and extends to the guide portion 765 with a margin length, and is fixed to the guide portion 765 by a fixing tool such as a binding band.

The electrical wiring DK2 is guided in a direction passing through the inside of the path portion 765b toward the opening 765a, and the guide straight line D1 which is a straight line that coincides with this direction is the radial direction of the rotation shaft of the shaft-supported means 760. Match (pass the axis of rotation). That is, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is guided to the shaft-supported means 760 from the rotational radial direction of the shaft-supported means 760.

Thus, the load (the load in the tension direction or the load in the compression direction) applied to the electrical wiring DK2 with the rotational displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 is equalized regardless of the rotation direction of the shaft-supported means 760. be able to. That is, since the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 along with the rotational displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 can be made uniform, the durability of the electric wiring DK2 can be improved.

50 to 51, the end portion of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the shaft-supported means 760 (hereinafter also referred to as the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2) is displaced in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the vertical movement of FIGS. 51 to 52, the connection end of the electrical wiring DK1 is displaced in the direction including the left-right direction component due to the posture change of the shaft-supported means 760. The displacement of the connection end of the electric wiring DK1 will be described.

51 to 52, the displacement base member 720 is lowered by the first distance L1, while the movement distance of the connection end of the electric wiring DK2 is shortened to the second distance L2 (L1>L2). ). That is, by reducing the amount of displacement of the electrical wiring DK2, the load that can be applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced, so that disconnection of the electrical wiring DK2 can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, by shortening the displacement amount of the electric wiring DK2, the movement range of the electric wiring DK2 can be easily kept within a range hidden by the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13, and the electric wiring DK2 can be played. Since it can be made difficult for a person to visually recognize, the electric wiring DK2 can be easily arranged near the front side.

Further, the connection end of the electric wiring DK2 is displaced upward while the displacement base member 720 is displaced downward. Accordingly, an upward load that is contrary to the downward load generated by the inertia in the electric wiring DK2 when the displacement base member 720 that has been displaced downward is stopped can be applied to the electric wiring DK2 in advance. Therefore, the load that can be applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be offset, and the fatigue that is applied to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced.

In the state where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the descending end position, the connection end of the electric wiring DK2 is farthest from the fixing forming portion 718, and a large tensile load is likely to occur on the electric wiring DK2. Then, the guide straight line D1 that coincides with the direction in which the electrical wiring DK2 is guided by the shaft-supported means 760 is close to the fixing forming portion 718.

Accordingly, when the connection end of the electric wiring DK2 is farthest from the fixing formation portion 718, the electric wiring DK2 can be arranged in a state of being extended straight from the fixing formation portion 718 to the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid generation of a load in the pulling direction on the electrical wiring DK2.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 suitably acts on the displacement of the electric wiring DK2, but if the shaft-supported means 760 is rotationally displaced only for the displacement of the electric wiring DK2, It may be configured such that only the left shaft-supported means 760L is rotationally displaced and the right shaft-supported means 760R is fixed to the displacement base member 720. In this case, the second motion unit 700 can form a left-right asymmetric motion effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 is generated symmetrically, the vertical movement of the second operation unit 700 can be generated in a right-left balance, so that the displacement base as the vertical movement portion is used. The wobbling of the member 720 can be suppressed. Further, by causing the displacement of the pivotally supported means 760 to be bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to improve the balance as a motion effect.

The driven displacement member 763 of the shaft-supported means 760 includes a wire fixing portion 763b formed on the side close to the front lid member 762 so that a fixing member such as a binding band for fixing the electric wiring DK3 can be inserted therethrough.

In the electric wiring DK3, the connector arranged on the opposite side of the front cover member 762 with respect to the portion fixed by the wiring fixing portion 763b is connected to the connector portion 764a (see FIG. 46) of the decorative board 764.

An effect different from the effect described above as the effect of the curved shape portion 744a will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 53, a state in which the rotating arm member 743 reciprocates around the lower end position of the displacement base member 720 is illustrated in time series.

53(a), 53(b) and 53(c) are front views of the rotating arm member 743 and the terminal gear 745. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 53A, the eccentric column portion 746 enters the curved shape portion 744a, and the rotation arm member 743 is at a position where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the descending end position (hereinafter, referred to as the rotation arm member 743). 53(b), the terminal gear 745 rotates counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 53(a), and the rotating arm member 743 moves to an intermediate position (FIG. 53(b)). 51), the rotating arm member 743 is displaced downward by the weight of the displacement base member 720, and the rotating arm member 743 disposed at the descending end position is shown in FIG. 53C. To be done.

The time-series changes shown in FIGS. 53A to 53C are, for example, controlled such that after the driving force of the driving motor 731 is generated in one direction, the driving force is intentionally released. This can happen in some cases.

That is, the drive motor 731 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 53(a) to the state shown in FIG. 53(b), and when the state shown in FIG. When the rotating arm member 743 is displaced downward to the descending end position by the, the state shown in FIG. 53C is reached.

In the state shown in FIG. 53(c), not the driving force of the drive motor 731 but the end gear 745 as a result of being driven by the rotating arm member 743 being displaced downward by its own weight is shown, and the eccentric column portion is shown. 746 does not enter the curved shape portion 744a.

Therefore, since the function of preventing rebound that occurs when the eccentric column portion 746 enters the curved shape portion 744a does not occur, the revolving arm member 743 rebounds after the state shown in FIG. It can be configured so as to be capable of bouncing displacement).

That is, in the present embodiment, the bounce displacement is caused depending on the case where the rotating arm member 743 is arranged at the descending end position by the driving force of the drive motor 731 and the case where the rotating arm member 743 is arranged at the descending end position by its own weight. Since the ease of (bounce displacement) can be changed, the operation of the rotating arm member 743 can be given an unexpected effect.

Here, the displacement due to its own weight and the operation speed are likely to be non-uniform as compared with the controllable mode such as the operation by the drive motor 731. Further, the variation is likely to occur due to uncertain circumstances such as the sliding resistance and the installation angle of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). For example, the rotating arm member 743 may be downwardly displaced at a high speed due to the weight of the displacement base member 720 or the like, or may be slightly slowly downwardly displaced.

When the descending displacement of the rotating arm member 743 occurs at a high speed, the eccentric column portion 746 is also displaced vigorously. Therefore, when the rotating arm member 743 is arranged at the descending end position, the eccentric column portion 746 transmits the transmitting hole 744. When it is configured to contact the inner surface of the longitudinal end of the eccentric column portion, the load applied from the transmission hole 744 to the eccentric column portion 746 becomes large, and the eccentric column portion 746 may break early.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rotating arm member 743 is arranged at the lower end position, the eccentric column portion 746 only enters the curved shape portion 744a, and the inner surface of the longitudinal end portion of the transmission hole 744 is reduced. Since the contact with the eccentric column portion 746 does not occur, the durability of the eccentric column portion 746 can be improved.

Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect of repeatedly causing the change along the time series shown in FIGS. 53A to 53C while minimizing the load on the eccentric column portion 746. In order to repeatedly cause the time-series changes shown in FIGS. 53A to 53C, the drive mode for changing the state of FIG. 53A to the state of FIG. 53B is intermittent. It can be caused to. As a result, it is possible to execute an action effect in which the shaft-supported means 760 (see FIG. 38) repeats the vertical reciprocating displacement in small steps.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the second operation unit 700. In FIG. 54, the state where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the descending end position is shown. Note that, in FIG. 54, for easy understanding, the illustration of the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted.

54 shows a state in which the shaft-supported means 760 is displaced upward as compared with the state shown in FIG. That is, in comparison with the inclination angle of the shaft-supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line in the state shown in FIG. 52, the inclination angle of the shaft-supported means 760 with respect to the horizontal line is larger in the state shown in FIG.

The state shown in FIG. 54 occurs, for example, when the displacement base member 720 suddenly descends and is placed at the descending end position. In this case, the displacement base 720 is maintained at the descending end position due to the effect of the above-described bounce prevention (bounce prevention), while inertia acts to continue the displacement while changing the inclination angle of the pivoted support means 760. Therefore, only the pivoted means 760 is displaced.

Here, as long as the acceleration due to the inertia acting on the shaft-supported means 760 is smaller than the acceleration due to its own weight, only the shaft-supported means 760 is not displaced, and the displacement base member 720 is maintained at the descending end position. Similarly, the pivoted means 760 is maintained in the arrangement shown in FIG.

That is, when the disposition of the shaft-supported means 760 is maintained after the displacement base member 720 reaches the descending end position due to the magnitude of the descending speed of the displacement base member 720 (small descending speed), the displacement base member 720 is It is possible to configure a case where the shaft-supported means 760 is displaced due to inertia after reaching the descending end position (a descending speed is high). As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

Even in the change from the state shown in FIG. 52 to the state shown in FIG. 54, the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2 is displaced to the upper side which is the fixing shape portion 718 side, so that the electric wiring DK2 is excessively pulled. It can be avoided.

Here, when the displacement base member 720 is displaced downward at a high speed, the inertia of the electric wiring DK2 becomes larger and the electric wiring DK2 is more likely to project downward, but the displacement base member 720 descends at a lower speed. Since the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2 is further displaced to the upper side as compared with the case of being displaced, when the displacement base member 720 that has been displaced downward is stopped, the electric wiring DK2 is electrically opposed to the downward load generated by inertia. The upward load applied in advance to the wiring DK2 can be increased.

Therefore, even if the load due to the inertia that can be applied to the electric wiring DK2 is large, it can be sufficiently offset by the upward load given to the electric wiring DK2 in advance, and the fatigue given to the electric wiring DK2 is reduced. be able to.

The feature of displacing the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2 to the upper side by the displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 is effective when the electric wiring DK2 needs to be loosened. This is particularly useful when there are a plurality of variations in the displacement of the shaft support means 760.

That is, when there are a plurality of variations in the displacement of the supported shaft means 760, the tensile load generated in the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed by the entire arrangement of the supported shaft means 760, so that the looseness of the electrical wiring DK2 is minimized. Compared with the arrangement of 760 (see FIG. 54), the slack of the electrical wiring DK2 becomes larger in other arrangements of the pivotally supported means 760 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

Therefore, without any measures, in an arrangement in which the slack of the electric wiring DK2 is large, the electric wiring DK2 is likely to be excessively displaced by the inertial force, the possibility of being visually recognized by the player is increased, and the production may be hindered. ..

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the shaft-supported means 760 is displaced so as to generate a load in the direction that cancels the load due to the inertia that can be applied to the electric wiring DK2, Even if it is controlled to stop the pivotally supported means 760 in an arrangement in which the slack becomes large, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring DK2 from being excessively displaced due to inertial force, so that the electric wiring DK2 can be visually recognized by the player. Sex can be lowered.

In the present embodiment, the limit position of displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 due to inertia is defined by the relationship with the connecting means 770. That is, as shown in FIG. 54, the rotation upper end position of the shaft-supported means 760 is set as the position where the cylindrical fastening portion 766 is arranged at the end of the elongated opening 774 of the connecting means 770. That is, the pivotally supported means 760 is configured to be rotationally displaceable between the tilt angle shown in FIG. 52 and the tilt angle shown in FIG.

In other words, the coupling means 770 prevents excessive displacement of the pivotally supported means 760 due to inertia, so that the load applied to the electrical wiring DK2 in the operating range of the pivotally supported means 760 is kept low. It can be limited to a range.

As described above, the connecting means 770 has a function of providing a time difference between the displacement period of the displacement base member 720 and the rotational displacement period of the shaft-supported means 760, and also has a load to give the displacement of the shaft-supported means 760 to the electric wiring DK2. It has a function to limit the range that is kept low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the durability of the electric wiring DK2 can be improved by the member that can execute the motion effect with a time lag.

In the present embodiment, the displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is displaced to the descending end position by the driving force of the drive motor 731 (see FIG. 52) and the displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is displaced to the descending end position by its own weight (FIG. 53). 2), the second operation unit 700 can be operated.

In addition, as the displacement mode of the pivotally supported means 760 after the displacement base member 720 reaches the descending end position, the displacement mode in which the displacement base member 720 is maintained in the posture at the time when it reaches the descending end position, and the displacement It is possible to operate the second operation unit 700 in a displacement mode in which the base member 720 continues to be displaced by inertia even after reaching the descending end position.

Among the control methods for intentionally selecting and causing these displacement modes, another method of the above-described method of adjusting the speed of the downward displacement will be described.

The displacement base member 720 is configured to be displaceable between the ascending end position and the descending end position, and by adjusting the length of time from when reaching the descending end position until starting the ascending displacement, The displacement mode of the shaft support means 760 can be adjusted.

For example, when the time from when the displacement base member 720 reaches the descending end position until when the displacement base member 720 starts ascending displacement is short, a load in the rotational direction that pushes back the supported shaft supporting means 760 is generated, and the inertial force of the supported shaft supporting means 760 is generated. Are offset. Therefore, the displacement base member 720 is displaced upward without the axially supported means 760 being rotationally displaced too much (without having the posture shown in FIG. 54).

On the other hand, for example, when it takes a long time from when the displacement base member 720 reaches the descending end position until when the displacement base member 720 starts the ascending displacement, the shaft-supported means 760 is rotationally displaced by inertial force too much (the posture shown in FIG. 54). If no load in the rotational direction that pushes back the shaft-supported means 760 is generated by the time, the shaft-supported means 760 is excessively rotationally displaced due to inertial force, and is returned to the rotation lower-side end position by gravity and then displaced. The base member 720 is displaced upward.

In this way, by adjusting the length of time from when the displacement base member 720 reaches the descending end position to when starting the ascending displacement, it is possible to adjust the displacement mode of the shaft-supported means 760.

55 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. In FIG. 55, the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768, and the rendering means 780 which are omitted in FIG. 50 are illustrated without omission.

As shown in FIG. 55, since the electric wiring DK3 is a pair of electric wirings arranged substantially symmetrically, the electric wiring DK3 will be described in detail as the arrangement of the electric wiring DK3 on the left side, and the electric wiring DK3 on the right side will be described. The description is omitted.

The electrical wiring DK3 is arranged so as to be inserted into a plurality of positions of the displacement base member 720 from the rear surface side, one end portion is connected to the connector portion 764a from the rear surface side through the opening 724a, and the other end portion is It is connected to the connection terminal 784 from the back side through the elongated opening 728a. In the assembled state, the opening 724a and the elongated opening 728a are formed at positions that are shielded by the effecting means 780 when viewed from the front, and thus it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK3 from being viewed by the player when viewed from the front. (See Figure 16). Hereinafter, the connector portion 764a side will be described as the upstream side of the electrical wiring DK3, and the connection terminal 784 side will be described as the downstream side of the electrical wiring DK3.

The arrangement of the electric wiring DK3 is fixed on the downstream side. In other words, it is only on the upstream side of the opening 724a that the electric wiring DK3 needs to be displaced due to the influence of the operation of another configuration. That is, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 occurs due to the displacement of the connector portion 764a accompanying the rotational displacement of the shaft-supported means 760.

Here, since the electric wiring DK3 is supported by the opening 724a serving as the rotation shaft of the shaft-supported means 760, a load in the pulling direction is generated on the electric wiring DK3 as the shaft-supported means 760 rotates. It can be easily avoided.

Further, since the electric wiring DK3 is arranged at the corner (concave portion) of the opening 762a of the front lid member 762 arranged on the front side of the opening 724a, the electric wiring DK3 has a larger opening than the case of being arranged in the circular opening. The arrangement within 762a is limited. As a result, the degree to which the electric wiring DK3 rubs against the edge of the opening 762a can be reduced, and thus the durability of the electric wiring DK3 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK3 is greater than that in the case where the electrical wiring DK3 is arranged without passing through the rear surface side of the displacement base member 720 and is connected to the connector portion 764a and the connection terminal 784. The range to be applied can be limited, and the tensile load can be prevented from occurring in the range, so that the durability of the electrical wiring DK3 can be improved.

Further, when the electric wiring DK3 is arranged without passing through the rear surface side of the displacement base member 720 and is connected to the connector portion 764a and the connection terminal 784, the electric wiring DK3 is guided from the connector portion 764a toward the front surface side. Therefore, in order to avoid interference with the supported means 760, it is necessary to fix the electric wiring DK3 at a plurality of places.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK3 is guided to the end rear surface side. That is, since the electric wiring DK3 is guided in the direction away from the shaft-supported means 760, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the shaft-supported means 760 and the electric wiring DK3 interfere with each other. Therefore, since the number of separate fixing means such as a binding band can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the number of working steps and the material cost.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring DK3 on the downstream side will be described. The electric wiring DK3 passes through the elongated opening 728a, the outside of the U-shaped overhanging portion 728b (the side opposite to the spring cover SC1), the regulation opening 785b of the rendering means 780, and is connected to the connection terminal 784. ..

By arranging in this way, it is possible to avoid interference between the electric wiring DK3 and the spring cover SC1. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, since the electric wiring DK3 is restricted from being displaced toward the spring cover SC1 side by the U-shaped overhanging portion 728b and the main body plate portion 781a (see FIG. 48), a binding band or the like. Even if the electric wiring DK3 is not fixed by the fixing member, it is possible to avoid a situation where the electric wiring DK3 and the spring cover SC1 interfere with each other.

56 is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LVI-LVI of FIG. 50, FIG. 57 is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LVII-LVII of FIG. 51, and FIG. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along the line LVIII-LVIII in FIG. 52.

That is, FIG. 56 shows a state where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the rising end position, FIG. 57 shows a state where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at an intermediate position, and FIG. 58 shows the displacement base member. The state in which 720 is arranged at the descending end position is shown. 56 to 58, the decorative member 768 and the rendering means 780 which are not shown in FIGS. 50, 51 and 52 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 56 to FIG. 58, the coil spring SP1 changes its direction in such a manner as to be wound around the flanged tubular member 751, extends downward so as to pass through the front side of the displacement base member 720 in the left-right center, and has a tip end portion. The displacement base member 720 is fixed to the protruding fastening portion 722.

A spring cover SC1 is disposed on the front side of the coil spring SP1, and the line of sight of the spring cover SC1 from the lateral direction side is a side wall SC1a protruding from the lateral direction edge of the spring cover SC1 to the rear side. Shielded by. Therefore, the coil spring SP1 can be hidden by the spring cover SC1.

Since the coil spring SP1 is a member that applies an urging force to the displacement base member 720, it is preferable that the coil spring SP1 extends in the moving direction (vertical direction) of the displacement base member 720 and is connected to the center (horizontal center) of the displacement base member 720.

On the other hand, when a member for guiding the moving direction of the displacement base member 720 (for example, the metal slide rail 711 in the present embodiment) is arranged, the same arrangement is preferable, but either one is used to avoid interference. Measures were taken by arranging them so that they were displaced from the center, or by arranging them so as to be displaced from the center by the same amount.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the spring cover SC1 is configured to be able to enter between the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780, and the coil spring SP1 is hidden by the spring cover SC1. Since the coil spring SP1 can be arranged between the displacement base member 720 and the rendering means 780 while avoiding the situation seen by the player, the coil spring SP1 can be arranged by disposing the metal slide rail 711 on the back side of the displacement base 720. Interference with can be easily avoided.

As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the metal slide rail 711 can be improved, so that both the coil spring SP1 and the metal slide rail 711 can be connected to the horizontal center position of the displacement base member 720.

The spring cover SC1 is arranged in the minimum necessary range. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the protruding fastening portion 722 as the connection end portion of the coil spring SP1 can be displaced beyond the formation range of the spring cover SC1.

That is, unlike the case where the entire arrangement range of the coil spring SP1 is covered, the spring cover SC1 alone is not a design concept for avoiding the exposure of the coil spring SP1, and the spring cover is extended to a range where the exposure can be avoided by other members. The design concept is that SC1 is not formed.

According to the present embodiment, even in the range where the spring cover SC1 is omitted, the rendering means 780 is arranged on the front side thereof so as to partially overlap the spring cover SC1 in a front view. Therefore, the coil spring SP1 can be prevented from being exposed.

By designing in this way, the vertical length of the spring cover SC1 can be shortened, and the material cost can be reduced. In addition, as will be described later, the lower end portion of the spring cover SC1 and the lower shield member 788 of the rendering means 780 overlap each other in the moving direction of the rendering means 780, so that the spring cover SC1 can displace the rendering means 780. Even if there is a possibility that the limit is restricted, the degree of the restriction can be lowered.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the ascending end position, the player often looks at the second operation unit 700 mainly from the front side looking up. As described above, the spring cover SC1 is designed to prevent the coil spring SP1 from being exposed when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as can be seen from the fact that the side wall SC1a is not arranged at the lower end of the spring cover SC1 for the purpose of widening the arrangement range of the coil spring SP1, the shielding function of the spring cover SC1 when looking up is seen. Is not enough.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 56 is the standby state of the second operation unit 700, and is the state that may be maintained for the longest time, so the coil spring SP1 is visually recognized by the player in the state shown in FIG. It is important to configure it so that it is not done. If the degree of line-of-sight shielding is low, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be seen by the player when the vicinity of the coil spring SP1 is reflected, and the effect may be reduced. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower shield member 788 of the rendering means 780 is arranged over a wide range in the left and right below the spring cover SC1 and the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 48), the shield function against the direction of looking up. Can be improved.

In addition, since the lower shield member 788 is arranged up to a position close to the front end of the displacement base member 720, the coil spring SP1 and the spring cover SC1 are included in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to avoid glare.

The spring cover SC1 is not limited to the member whose state is fixed. For example, a part of the spring cover SC1 may be fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720 so that the spring cover SC1 can be expanded and contracted along with the displacement of the displacement base member 720. Examples of the method of implementation include an example in which the spring cover SC1 is made of a flexible material that expands and contracts, or a bellows shape is made of cloth or the like.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the spring cover SC1 is configured as a fixed plate member, it is possible to avoid the displacement base member 720 being given a displacement resistance from the spring cover SC1. As a result, the driving force required to displace the displacement base member 720 can be reduced.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative portion arranged on the inner side (lower side) of the boundary wall portion 86b is fixed to the center frame 86, but the center frame 2086 of the second embodiment corresponds to the decorative portion. The decorative member 2086f is configured to be displaceable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

59(a) and 59(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment taken along the line XX of FIG. FIG. 59(a) shows a state where the solenoid 2086d is de-energized, and FIG. 59(b) shows a state where the solenoid 2086d is excited.

Note that the glass unit 2016 in the present embodiment is formed to project to the front side, at least on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, unlike the glass unit 16 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 1).

That is, the glass unit 2016 is a front frame so as to cover the rear glass unit 2016a and the window portion 14c, which are arranged to face the base plate 60 at least on the front side of the game area so as to form the front side wall surface of the spherical flow path. The front glass unit 2016b obliquely fixed to 14 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the center frame 2086 has a solenoid 2086d arranged below the boundary wall portion 86b in addition to the configuration of the center frame 86 described above in the first embodiment. A displacement portion 2086e, which is fixed to the displacement side tip of the plunger of the solenoid 2086d and has an L-shaped opening, and a decoration which is displaceably arranged inside (lower side) of the boundary wall portion 86b and is provided with a decorative shape A member 2086f (corresponding to a decorative portion), and a connecting portion 2086g that is connected to the displacing portion 2086e by protruding from the end of the decorative member 2086f in a cylindrical shape parallel to the rotation axis and being inserted into the opening of the displacing portion 2086e. Is mainly equipped.

The solenoid 2086d is arranged such that the plunger moves up and down. When energized, the solenoid is in an excited state and the plunger projects to the upper side. When energized, the excited state is released and the plunger is provided with a return spring. It returns to the lower side with power.

The displacement portion 2086e has, as an L-shaped configuration, an elongated hole 2086e1 formed in a front and rear elongated elongated hole shape, and an auxiliary hole 2086e2 extending upward from an end portion on the front surface side of the elongated hole 2086e1. Equipped with. The thickness of the long hole 2086e1 and the auxiliary hole 2086e2 is configured to be slightly longer than the diameter of the connecting portion 2086g. Accordingly, the connecting portion 2086g can be configured to be movable in the L-shaped opening.

The auxiliary hole 2086e2 is configured such that the connecting portion 2086g is arranged when the solenoid 2086d is in the non-excited state. As a result, the load applied to the displacement portion 2086e via the connecting portion 2086g due to the displacement of the decorative member 2086f can be directed in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the plunger of the solenoid 2086d can be displaced. Wobble can be suppressed.

The decorative member 2086f is rotatably supported by the left-right axis at the inner position (lower position) of the center frame 2086, and when the solenoid 2086d is excited, the decorative member 2086f rotates at an angle exceeding 90 degrees (see FIG. 59(b)). Thus, the width of the blind spot of the line of sight YE3 can be changed by displacing the decorative member 2086f.

That is, in the state before energizing the solenoid 2086d (see FIG. 59(a)), not only the boundary wall portion 86b but also the decorative member 2086f intersects with the line of sight YE3. The rear side of the wall portion 86b (corresponding to the shielded area SE1) became difficult to see, and the blind spot was wide.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2086b is energized to be in an excited state (see FIG. 59(b)), the decorative member 2086f is arranged outside the line of sight YE3, so that the visibility at the line of sight YE3 is increased and the boundary wall portion 86b is increased. A part of the shielded area SE1 can be visually recognized through the window.

That is, when only the boundary wall portion 86b as the light-transmissive thin plate portion intersects the line of sight YE3, the visibility does not deteriorate so that the rear side of the boundary wall portion 86b in the line of sight YE3 becomes invisible as a blind spot. The shielded area SE1 can be visually recognized well.

As described above, according to this embodiment, by driving the solenoid 2086b, it is possible to change the range of the blind spot through the boundary wall portion 86b and the decorative portion. Therefore, for example, in the case where the game area is configured so that the profit obtained by the player may change due to the change in the visibility of the ball rolling on the upper portion of the boundary wall portion 86b, at an appropriate timing. By controlling to drive the solenoid 2086b, the comfort of the game can be improved.

That is, it is required to move the position of the head to the vicinity of the boundary wall portion 86b in order to see the ball rolling on the upper portion of the boundary wall portion 86b well (it is required to move to the vicinity of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1)). As compared with the case where the game is forced to be performed in an inconvenient posture, the present embodiment in which the shielded range SE1 can be visually recognized with normal eye placement can improve the comfort of the game. ..

The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. In the first embodiment, the case where the gap is provided so as to avoid contact between the spring cover SC1 and the displacement base member 720 has been described. However, in the second operation unit 3700 of the third embodiment, the spring cover SC3 is the displacement base. It contacts the member 3720 and functions as a member that guides the displacement base member 3720. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60(a) and 61 are front views of the second operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a front perspective view of the small diameter collar C3. In FIG. 60A and FIG. 61, the illustration of the electric circuit board 764, the decoration member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 60A shows a state in which the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the assembly preparation position below the spring cover SC3, and FIG. 61 shows a state in which the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the descending end position. Is illustrated.

In FIG. 60A, the displacement base member 3720 is arranged below the descending end position. That is, one feature of the present embodiment is that the displacement base member 3720 is assembled by arranging the displacement base member 3720 below the descending end position and then raising it to the descending end position. This will be described below.

First, the difference between the rotating arm member 3743 of the transmitting means 3740 and the rotating arm member 743 in the first embodiment will be described. In the rotating arm member 3743, the formation of the connecting column portion 743b is omitted (see FIG. 43), a through hole slightly larger than the female screw of the connecting column portion 743b is formed at the corresponding position, and the outer shape is the collar C1. A similar thin collar C3 is provided (see FIG. 61).

The fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the small-diameter collar C3 is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip end portion of the rotating arm member 3743 (the root position of the connecting column portion 743b before omission), so that the small diameter The collar C3 is supported by the rotating arm member 3743.

With this configuration, since the long opening 723 of the displacement base member 3720 is not connected to the rotating arm member 3743 before the small-diameter collar C3 is assembled to the rotating arm member 3743, the displacement base member 3720 is lowered. It can be placed in an assembly preparation position, which is a position below the end position.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 61, the displacement base member 3720 is completed after the assembling of the pivotally supported means 760 to the displacement base member 3720 and the assembling of the coupling means 770 to the pivotally supported means 760 and the fixed base member 701 have been completed. Can be placed in the assembly preparation position. As a result, the degree of freedom in the assembling order can be improved.

By disposing the displacement base member 3720 at the assembly preparation position and then raising it to the descending end position, the configuration of the upper end portion of the displacement base member 3720 and the spring cover SC3 can be engaged, and in the engaged state, the small diameter is obtained. As described in the first embodiment, the displacement base member 3720 is fixed by fastening the fastening screw, which is inserted into the small-diameter collar C3 with the collar C3 inserted into the elongated opening 723, to the rotating arm member 3743. It is possible to restrict the displacement below the lower end position.

That is, the displacement base member 3720 can be arranged in the assembly preparation position only before the assembly, and can be prevented from being arranged in the assembly preparation position after the assembly is completed. This can reduce the possibility that the configuration of the upper end portion of the displacement base member 3720 and the spring cover SC3 are unintentionally released.

The spring cover SC3 is made of a light-impermeable resin material or metal material, and is recessed parallel to the left and right ends of the vertical elongated portion SC3a arranged on the front side of the displacement base member 3720 in the vertical direction. It mainly includes a pair of guide recessed portions SC3b and left and right extending portions SC3c extending from the upper end portion of the vertical elongated portion SC3a to the left and right sides.

The guide recessed portion SC3b functions as a portion that receives the roller member 3729 of the displacement base member 3720 and guides the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 3720.

The displacement base member 3720 is provided with a pair of roller members 3729 which are rotatably supported at the left and right symmetrical positions of the upper end of the main body plate 721 and are formed in a roller-like annular shape. The roller member 3729 is arranged to be engageable with the guide recess SC3b when the displacement base member 3720 is displaced from the assembly preparation position (see FIG. 60A) to the descending end position (see FIG. 61). ..

As a result, as the displacement base member 3720 is vertically displaced, the roller member 3729 abuts against the guide recessed portion SC3b and rolls, so that the operating resistance (friction) between the spring cover SC3 and the displacement base member 3720 is reduced. Resistance) can be reduced.

The left and right extending portions SC3c contact the upper end portion of the roller member 3729 when the displacement base member 3720 is placed at the rising end position (the position and orientation at which the displacement base member 720 is placed in FIG. 50) in an appropriate posture. It is arranged so that it can touch.

Accordingly, the left and right extending portions SC3c can function as a portion that corrects the posture of the displacement base member 3720. That is, although the displacement base member 3720 is restrained from engaging the roller member 3729 and the guide recessed portion SC3b and the posture shift due to the metal slide rail 711 (see FIG. 56), the deterioration of the roller member 3729 and the metal slide rail 711 is suppressed. For other reasons, there is a possibility that the displacement base member 3720 may change its posture in such a manner that the displacement base member 3720 tilts to the left and right in a front view.

If the displacement base member 3720 is repeatedly moved up and down with the posture changed, an extra load is applied to the roller member 3729 and the metal slide rail 711, and it is highly possible that the deterioration further progresses, so that the original posture can be restored. It is preferable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the rising end position in an appropriate posture, the upper end portion of the roller member 3729 is configured to be capable of contacting the left and right extending portions SC3c, so that the displacement When the base member 3720 is tilted to the left and right, it is possible to secure a large load (downward load) applied to the high-side roller member 3729 from the left and right extending portions SC3c.

Therefore, the posture change of the displacement base member 3720 can be returned to an appropriate posture side by the load in the pressing direction generated from the left and right extending portions SC3c. That is, since the posture of the displacement base member 3720 can be restored every time the displacement base member 3720 is arranged at the ascending end position, it is possible to avoid repeating the up and down displacement while the posture of the displacement base member 3720 is changed. Can be made easier.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, it is not necessary to arrange the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 before the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b, so that the assembling work can be easily performed.

The work of arranging and connecting the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 after engaging the roller member 3729 with the guide recessed portion SC3b can be easily performed by using the configuration described in the first embodiment.

Since it is difficult to assemble the pivotally supported means 760 after connecting the rotating arm member 743 to the displacement base member 3720 (difficult to fasten the fastening screw), the state shown in FIGS. Therefore, it is considered that the pivotally supported means 760 is in the assembled state. That is, an unillustrated decorative board 764 and a decorative member 768 are also integrated, and the electric wirings DK2 and DK3 are projected from the left and right ends.

On the other hand, in order to assemble the small-diameter collar C3 into the elongated opening 723 of the displacement base member 3720 later, the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b when the production means 780 is assembled to the displacement base member 3720. I will do it later.

At the descending end position of the displacement base member 3720 shown in FIG. 61, the portions through which the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 are inserted (the long opening 728a of the interference avoiding component 728, the opening 762a of the front lid member 762, and the opening 772a of the front lid member 772). ) Is visible without being hidden, it is easy to insert the electrical wirings DK2 and DK3 into these portions.

For example, regarding the disposition of the electric wiring DK2, after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b, the electric wiring DK2 is fixed to the fixing shape portion 718, and the electric wiring DK2 is assembled so as to crawl to the back side through the opening 772a. good.

Further, for example, regarding the disposition of the electric wiring DK3, the connecting means of the electric wiring DK3 is previously exposed from the opening 762a to the front side, and the directing means 780 is connected to the connecting terminal 784 of the directing means 780 by the displacement base. It may be fastened and fixed to the member 3720.

As another method for disposing the electric wiring DK3, a connection end portion of the electric wiring DK3 is preliminarily exposed from the opening 762a to the front side, and the production means 780 is fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 3720, and then is exclusively used. The connecting end of the electric wiring DK3 may be connected to the connecting terminal 784 using a jig (not shown). According to the present embodiment, a gap for passing the spring cover SC3 is formed between the rendering means 780 and the displacement base member 3720, and thus the gap is used to connect the connection end of the electric wiring DK3 to the connection terminal. It can be easily guided to 784.

Further, at the lower end position of the displacement base member 3720 shown in FIG. 61, the displacement base member 3720 and the fixed base member 701 do not overlap with each other in a front view, so after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b. Thus, the displacement base member 3720 of the rendering means 780 can be assembled.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. In the first embodiment, the case where the adjustment member 165 as a member that does not affect the shape of the flow-down path FL1 is arranged in the recessed portion 161e of the right rendering unit 160 is described, but the right rendering unit 4160 of the fourth embodiment is described. Then, the member arranged in the recessed portion 161e influences the shape of the flow path of the sphere. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rendering unit 4160 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rendering unit 4160. The right effect unit 4160 is a unit including the variable winning device 65, and is fitted into the small window portion 60b of the base plate 60 from the front side. The ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) of the variable winning device 65 flows down the downflow path formed on the back side of the right effect unit 4160 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the right performance unit 4160 is connected to the downstream side of the base member 161, the first flow path member 162, and the first flow path member 163, and the front side of the flow path of the sphere. It comprises a second flow path forming means 4163 which constitutes and a switching device 4164 which is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the second flow path forming means 4163 to switch the flow path of the sphere.

The second flow path forming means 4163 has a half-forming portion 4163a which is opened toward the back surface and forms a front side surface of the downflow path, and a right end portion of the half-forming portion 4163a which allows a sphere to pass in the front-rear direction. A plurality of detection sensors having a through hole 4163b which is provided so as to communicate with the lower end portion of the half forming portion 161a, and a detection opening which is fitted to the half forming portion 4163a and through which a sphere that has flowed down the downflow path can pass. In order to arrange SC1 and SC2 and the detection openings of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in the vicinity of the center of the flow-down path, a stretch is designed for the purpose of forming a frame portion around the detection openings of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2. The projecting portion 4163c and a plurality of insertion holes 4163d that are formed at both left and right ends and that can be inserted into the specific columnar fastening portions 161c and the columnar fastening portions 162c corresponding to the arrangement are provided.

The rear side of the overhanging portion 4163c that receives the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the thickness dimension of the frame portion of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and correspondingly, it is overhanging and formed to the front side.

The portion of the projecting portion 4163 that projects to the front side is disposed in the recessed portion 161e of the base member 161 in the state where the right performance unit 4160 is assembled. That is, the recessed portion 161e is likely to occur when the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are arranged as in the present embodiment, in addition to the purpose of arranging the plate-shaped adjusting member 165 as described in the first embodiment. This can be utilized for the purpose of disposing the overhanging portion 4163c.

The switching device 4164 includes a back surface closing portion 4164a having a plate-like surface that closes the half-forming portion 4163a from the back surface side, and a ball guiding portion 4164b protruding from the right end portion of the back surface closing portion 4164a toward the front surface in a triangular shape in a top view. And a receiving recess 4164c that is recessed for the purpose of receiving the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 at the lower end of the back blocking part 4164a, and a switch configured to be movable forward and backward at a position above the receiving recess 4164a on the detection sensor SC1 side. A valve 4164d, a solenoid 4164e for driving the switching valve 4164d, a plurality of insertion holes 4164f configured to be able to insert fastening screws screwed into the specific columnar fastening portion 161c and the columnar fastening portion 162c, and a second flow path. And a plurality of insertion holes 4164g configured to be able to insert the fastening screws screwed into the constituting means 4163.

The sphere that has passed through the passage 4163b flows down between the half-forming portion 4163a and the back blocking portion 4164a. That is, the flow path of the sphere is formed between the passage 4163b and the back surface blocking portion 4164a.

The ball guiding portion 4164b is disposed close to the inner surface on the right side of the passage 4163b, and is configured to be able to guide the sphere that has passed through the passage 4163b by the inclined surface on the front side. This can prevent the balls from staying on the rear surface side of the passage 4163b.

The switching valve 4164d changes its state between a regulation state in which it is arranged above the detection sensor SC1 and regulates a ball entering the detection sensor SC1, and a guidance state in which it guides the ball from above the detection sensor SC1 to the retreat detection sensor SC1. To do.

That is, when the solenoid 4164e is in the non-excited state, the switching valve 4164d is in the restricted state, and the ball that has flowed down the downflow path enters the detection sensor SC2. On the other hand, when the solenoid 4164e is excited, the switching valve 4164d is in the guiding state, and the ball that has flowed down the downflow path enters the detection sensor SC1.

The detection sensors SC1 and SC2, unlike a detection sensor for a prize ball (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a (upstream side of the first flow path member 162), detect passage of the ball. Thus, a specific area that can change to a state advantageous to the player and a non-specific area that does not change to a state advantageous to the player even when passage of a ball is detected are configured.

That is, the switching valve 4164d is set to be changeable in a plurality of patterns corresponding to the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a. For example, in the first state change pattern, the solenoid 4164e is de-energized at the timing when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a reaches the switching valve 4164d, and the ball enters the detection sensor SC2 (non-specific area). On the other hand, in the second state change pattern, the solenoid 4164e is excited at the timing when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a reaches the switching valve 4164d, and the ball is detected by the detection sensor SC1 (specific area). Controlled to enter.

Thus, by setting the pattern of the state change of the switching valve 4164d, it is possible to control the ball to enter either of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and the player can change the profit to be obtained. Able to play can be configured.

Since the recessed portion 161e can be used as a portion for disposing the overhanging portion 4163c in the present embodiment as well as a portion for disposing the adjusting member 165 in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 having different amusement properties can be used. It can be easily configured.

That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 has a game property that can be realized by disposing the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in the downflow route as in the present embodiment, detection for detecting a prize ball in the downflow route FL1 is performed. Even when an additional detection sensor other than the sensor is not required, the base member 161 can be diverted when configuring the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced as compared with the case where a mold for manufacturing the base member 161 is newly designed and manufactured.

When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 4164f is fastened and fixed to the specific columnar fastening portion 161c or the columnar fastening portion 162c, the fastening force is not applied to the second flow channel forming means 4163, and the second flow channel forming means is formed. 4163 is configured so that it can be slightly displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, the second flow path forming means 4163 is configured to be positionable by inserting the specific columnar fastening portion 161c or the columnar fastening portion 162c into the insertion hole 4163d, but is not configured to fix the position. It

The switching device 4164 and the second flow path forming means 4163 are fixed to each other by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 4164g into the second flow path forming means 4163. Thereby, the flow path shape on the downstream side of the through port 4163b can be defined by the molding accuracy of the second flow path forming means 4163 and the switching device 4164, and the large base member 161 and the first flow path member 162 can be formed. It is possible to avoid being affected by the molding accuracy.

As a result, while the accuracy of the flow path shape needs to be kept high because it affects the profits of the player (the downstream side of the passage 4163b), the molding accuracy requirement is increased, while the other parts ( It is possible to reduce the requirement for the molding accuracy of the base member 161 and the first flow path member 162) forming the flow path on the upstream side of the through port 4163b. That is, it is possible to achieve desired game playability while reducing the number of parts that require high molding accuracy.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. In the first embodiment, the fixing position of the electric wiring DK2 is the case where the fixing shape portion 718 is fixed and the guide portion 765 and the connector portion 764a are configured to be displaceable, but the second embodiment of the fifth embodiment is described. In the operation unit 5700, the fixing shape portion 5718 is configured to be displaceable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64 to 67 are front views of the second operation unit 5700 in the fifth embodiment. 64 to 67, the manner in which the displacement base member 720 of the second operation unit 5700 is displaced from the ascending end position to the descending end position is shown in time series. 64 to 67, the illustration of the electric decoration substrate 764, the decoration member 768, and the rendering means 780 is omitted for easy understanding.

64 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the rising end position, and FIG. 65 shows a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at an intermediate position between the ascending end position and the descending end position. 66 and 67, the state where the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the descending end position is shown.

67 shows a state in which the shaft-supported means 760 is displaced upward as compared with the state shown in FIG. That is, in comparison with the inclination angle of the supported shaft means 760 with respect to the horizontal line in the state shown in FIG. 65, the inclination angle of the supported shaft means 760 with respect to the horizontal line is larger in the state shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the left and right upper end stoppers 5717 and the fixing shape portion 5718 are configured as separate members from the fixed base member 5701, and the left and right upper stoppers 5717 and the fixing shape portion are provided at the left end portion of the fixed base member 5701. A solenoid SOL51 that generates a driving force that vertically displaces the 5718 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 64, the left and right upper stoppers 5717 in the state where the solenoid SOL51 is not energized (non-excited state) are the upper side surfaces of the driven displacement member 773 in a state in which the displacement base member 720 is arranged at the rising end position. It is arranged at a position (lower position) where it can abut.

On the other hand, the left and right upper stoppers 5717 in the state where the solenoid SOL51 is energized (excited state) are arranged at a position raised from the lowered position (raised position), as shown in FIG. Thus, the left and right upper stoppers 5717 are configured to be displaceable between the lowered position and the raised position.

The displacement of the electric wiring DK2 due to the displacement of the second operation unit 5700 will be described. In the displacement from FIG. 64 to FIG. 65, the distance between the fixing shape portion 5718 to which the electric wiring DK2 is fixed and the path portion 765b arranged near the connector portion 464a to which the electric wiring DK2 is fixed is reduced. Is changing. Therefore, the electrical wiring DK2 is in a state of being easily over-displaced downward due to the inertial force generated by the downward displacement of the displacement base member 720.

On the other hand, in FIG. 66, as described above, in addition to the electric wiring DK2 in the vicinity of the route portion 765b being pulled upward due to the change in the posture of the shaft-supported means 760, the solenoid SOL51 is energized and the fixing shape portion 5718 is provided. Is raised and displaced, the portion fixed to the fixing shape portion 5718 of the electric wiring DK2 is pulled upward. Therefore, it is possible to firmly suppress the excessive displacement of the electric wiring DK2 to the lower side.

Further, in FIG. 67, the energization of the solenoid SOL51 is released at the timing when the length of the electrical wiring DK2 drawn to the center side increases. Accordingly, the fixing shape portion 5718 can be arranged to the left of the path portion 765b of the shaft-supported means 760.

Therefore, the distance between the fixing shape portion 5718 and the path portion 765b can be shortened as compared with the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is arranged at the diagonally upper position of the path portion 765b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the tensile force applied to the electric wiring DK2 from becoming excessive, and it is possible to prevent the durability of the electric wiring DK2 from decreasing.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light source arranged on the back side of the center frame 86 passes through the flat plate portion 86a to the front side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the substrate may be directly fixed to the center frame 86, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the substrate may pass through the flat plate portion 86a and pass to the front side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the flat plate portion 86a is formed to have a smooth surface and the light transmittance is good has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a light diffusion shape may be formed on the flat plate portion 86a. As a result, since it is possible to make the flat plate portion 86a easily emit light on the surface, it is possible to execute a favorable light emission effect while reducing the number of light emitting means such as LEDs.

Although the case where the base plate 60 is formed as a wooden member has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed of a light transmissive resin material.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the boundary wall portion 86b as a portion that blocks the player's line of sight is projected from the front surface of the base plate 60 at a right angle has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the boundary wall portion 86b may be configured to project in a direction having a component in the surface direction of the base plate 60 (for example, an obliquely upward direction). In this case, it is possible to secure a wide shielded range SE1.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the boundary wall portion 86b is formed as a wall portion having the same width and extending in a strip shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the width of the boundary wall portion 86b may be formed in a band shape that changes depending on the position. In this case, it is possible to easily adjust the size of the shielded range SE1 for each arrangement.

In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary wall portion 86b blocks the field of view of the player has been described, but any means can be used as long as it is arranged on the front side of the game area, and the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a light guide plate (LED light guide panel) or a movable accessory.

The movable accessory is arranged, for example, on the back side of the center frame 86 in the standby state, and in the operating state, projects toward the front side toward the center frame 86, and the front side or the back side of the glass unit 16 is moved to the center frame 86. It may be displaced toward the outside in the front view. At this time, the plurality of glass units 2016 may be displaced and arranged on the front side of the center frame 2086 so as to block the line of sight of the player directed to the center frame 2086.

The means arranged in the shielded area SE1 is not limited at all. For example, a switching device (for example, switching device 4164) for switching whether or not a game ball enters a specific region (a region that can be changed to a state advantageous to a player by entering a ball) may be arranged. The second winning opening 640 having the electric accessory 640a and the variable winning device 65 having the specific winning opening 65a may be arranged. In this case, the player's line of sight may be (partially) blocked at a timing when the game ball can enter the specific area, the second winning opening 640, or the specific winning opening 65a to make it difficult to visually recognize. In this case, the player's attention to the specific area, the second winning opening 640, and the specific winning opening 65a can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the protrusion portion 155 having a protrusion shape is formed on the lower plate portion 152 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower plate portion 152 may be provided in a granular shape. In this case, since it is possible to easily generate a load in the front-back direction on the flowing ball, it is possible to improve the deceleration effect of the ball.

In the above-described first embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the protrusion portion 155 that causes the deceleration action is provided so as to protrude upward from the lower surface portion, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to project from the base plate 60 toward the front side, or to provide a member on the glass unit 16 side and project from the member to the back side. Further, the arrangement of the protruding shape portion is not limited to the left side of the game area, and may be arranged in the right striking flow path.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cross-sectional shapes of the protrusions 155 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shape may be such that the cross-sectional shape increases toward the back side (tapered shape). In this case, since the load toward the front side can be applied to the ball, the discharge of the ball from the outlet 71 can be delayed. Moreover, the magnitude relation of the cross-sectional shape may be reversed. In this case, it is possible to quickly discharge the ball from the outlet 71.

In the former case, the draft to the front side when resin molding the ridge 155 can be formed by the shape of the ridge 155. In the latter case, although it is difficult to form the front side by die-cutting, in the first embodiment, the ball guide member 154 is formed as a separate body, and since the upper portion of the protruding portion 155 is open, It can be easily manufactured by die-cutting to the upper surface side.

If die cutting to the upper surface side is taken into consideration, the degree of freedom in the shape of the protruding portion 155 can be improved. For example, the side with the larger cross-sectional shape of the above-mentioned taper shape can be replaced by adjacent ridges. In this case, since the reaction force that repeatedly rolls back and forth can be applied to the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the protruding portion 155, the stability of the flow of the game ball can be improved. Further, for example, the protrusions 155 may not be protrusions extending in the front-rear direction but may be protrusions extending obliquely, or protrusions extending in a wavy shape along the longitudinal direction of the lower plate portion 152. Good as a line.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second protruding portion 157 applies a diagonally upward load to the ball contacting from the downstream side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming a portion of the lower plate portion 152, which is connected to the right end of the second ridge portion 157, in a shape of a bottom lowered by the radius of the sphere, the sphere can be brought into contact with the right side portion 156c. To the right. This makes it easier to avoid the situation in which the ball runs up the second protrusion 157.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the second protruding portion 157 on the downstream side of the first protruding portion 156 has a smaller protruding amount, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second protrusion portion 157 on the downstream side may be configured with a larger protrusion amount than the first protrusion portion 156. In this case, it is possible to facilitate the retention of the ball at a position between the first ridge 156 and the second ridge 157.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the upper surface of the protruding portion 155 is formed of a smooth surface on which light is easily reflected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a light diffusion shape may be formed on the surface. In this case, the upper surface of the protruding portion 155 can be made to emit surface light, and the attention of the protruding portion 155 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light reflected by the facing plate portion 153 is visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mirror-finished reflecting member may be arranged on the front surface of the facing plate portion 153.

Moreover, you may arrange|position the separate light emission means which makes the left side production unit 150 shine. For example, a (high-rigidity or flexible) illuminated board is provided in the gap between the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 (a recess on the back side of the protrusion 155 may be used), and the illuminated board is provided. Light may be emitted to the inside of the game area by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the electric power accessory 640a. May be irradiated.

In this case, by configuring the light to be radiated toward the general winning opening 63, the shadow of the sphere flowing down near the general winning opening 63 can be extended to the upper side. Since it is possible to confirm the presence of the ball flowing down near the general winning opening 63, the presence of the ball can be enhanced.

Further, since the shadow of the general winning opening 63 can be extended to the upper side, it is possible to visually recognize two different types of shadows, that shadow (static) and the shadow (moving) of a sphere, and the existence of the general winning opening 63. Can stand out. As a result, the attention of the general winning opening 63 can be improved.

Further, the separate light emitting means is not limited to the case where the light emitting means is arranged on the decorative substrate. For example, a conductive adhesive is applied to the gap between the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61, and the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 are fixed in such a manner that the conductive adhesive and the contact points of the LEDs are fixed. The LEDs may be arranged in the space between the LEDs and the LEDs may be made to emit light by energizing the conductive adhesive. In this case, the function can be realized as long as there is a gap in which the LEDs can be arranged, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower plate portion 152 and the inner rail 61 can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball is guided from one of the left and right with respect to the outlet 71 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left and right sides of the outlet 71 may be opened and the balls may flow into the outlet 71 from the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light is reflected on the front side of the facing plate portion 153 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitted from a member (for example, the first operation unit 400) arranged on the back side of the general winning opening 63 may pass through the general winning opening 63 and reach the ball guiding member 154. good. In this case, the light can be refracted downward by using the inclined surface provided inside the sphere guide member 154 for the purpose of smoothing the flow of the sphere, and the light can reach the ridge 155. Therefore, the ridge portion 155 can be illuminated without providing a dedicated light emitting means.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 155 is arranged directly below the ball guide member 154 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the sphere flowing near the sphere guide member 154 has a large velocity having a left-right direction component and is easy to flow down, the ridge 155 is provided at a position overlapping the sphere guide member 154 when viewed in the direction of the velocity. May be. In this case, it is possible to prevent the sphere from landing on the ridge portion 155 even when the sphere flows down at a velocity having a horizontal component.

In the first embodiment, the case where the first flow path member 162 and the second flow path member 163 that are fastened and fixed to the base member 161 configure the downflow path FL1 in combination with only the base member 161 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side portion of the second flow path member 163 is extended below the lower end portion of the base member 161, and the flow-down path FL1 is formed by combining the extended portion with another flow path member that is arranged to face the extended portion. May be configured.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the adjusting member 165 is configured as a member different from the first flow path member 162 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjusting member 165 and the first flow path member 162 may be configured as an integrated body. In this case, the internal shape of the downflow path FL1 can be maintained by configuring the portion connecting the adjusting member 165 and the first flow path member 162 so as to pass outside the downflow path FL1.

In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the adjusting member 165 can be fixed to the base member 161 by fastening and fixing the second flow path member 163 to the base member 161, has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, individual screws for fastening and fixing the adjusting member 165 may be prepared.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fitting hole 165b is formed in the adjusting member 165 as the alignment of the second flow path member 163 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the fitting hole 165b or in addition to the fitting hole 165b, a wall portion that can come into contact with the outer surface of the second flow path member 163 from the back surface of the adjusting member 165 may be formed. As a result, the load received from the sphere flowing down the downflow path FL1 can be shared by the wall portion as well, so that the deformation of the second flow path member 163 can be prevented. Further, by not forming the wall portion on the inner surface side of the second flow path member 163, it is possible to secure the cross-sectional area of the region forming the downflow path FL1.

Although the case where the back surface of the base member 161 and the back surface of the adjusting member 165 are formed flush with each other has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 165 may be configured to have a dimensional relationship such that the adjustment member 165 protrudes from the back surface of the base member 161. In this case, when the second flow path member 163 is fastened and fixed to the base member 161, a compressive load can be applied to the adjusting member 165, so that the positional stability of the adjusting member 165 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the rotary unit 500 that accommodates and displaces the drive motor 541 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement mode of the accessory that accommodates and displaces the drive device may be a slide displacement, a displacement that is a combination of a rotational displacement and a slide displacement, or another complicated displacement.

Further, although the case where the drive motor 541 is arranged inside the rotating body 560 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that it is fixed to the back side of the rotating body 560 and is vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement of the rotating unit 500. Also in this case, the rotating body 560 can be configured to hide the drive motor 541 in a front view. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the drive motor 541 having a diameter larger than the diameter of the rotating body 560 can be adopted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 547 is disposed on the left and right opposite sides of the drive motor 541 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection sensor 547 may be disposed on the left side, the detection sensor 547 may be disposed outside the rotating body 560, or the drive motor having the function of determining the angle by omitting the provision of the detection sensor 547. 541 may be adopted.

Although the detection sensor 547 is indirectly fixed to the U-shaped metal plate 511 in the first embodiment, the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547 does not change, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .. For example, by rotatably supporting the U-shaped metal plate 511, the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547 may be changed. In this case, the control for detecting a plurality of postures of the rotating body 560 (two postures in this embodiment; corresponding to the case where the posture is arranged in the ascending position and the case where the posture is arranged in the descending position) is diverted. The visibility of the rotating body 560 can be increased. That is, since the stop position (stop angle) of the rotating body 560 viewed from the player changes with the change in the arrangement angle of the detection sensor 547, the visual recognition mode can be changed.

The rotational displacement of the U-shaped metal plate 511 (change in the arrangement angle of the detection lines s 547) may be configured to be executable independently of the vertical position of the rotating body 560. It may be configured to be executable in conjunction with vertical displacement (dependent on vertical position).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 faces the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation axis may be oriented in the front-rear direction or the up-down direction, or the orientation of the rotation axis may be changeable.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK1 is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electric wiring DK1 may be fixed with an adhesive tape, or may be fixed with an adhesive or the like.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case where the fixed position (the downward extending portion 519 and the wiring supporting portion 465) of the electric wiring DK1 arranged on the lower side of the rotating unit 500 is arranged on the same plane orthogonal to the left-right direction. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixed position of the electrical wiring DK1 may be displaced in the left-right direction. In this case, as compared with the case where the electric wiring DK1 is arranged on the same plane, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 can be increased, and the electric wiring DK1 can be easily changed in the winding state. .. That is, since the electric wiring DK1 is likely to change its state in a spiral shape, the diameter of the arc formed by the curved electric wiring DK1 is reduced when the rotary unit 500 is arranged in the lowered position and the fixed positions are brought close to each other. Since it is possible to reduce the reaction force received from the strip-shaped extending portion 463, the load applied to the electrical wiring DK1 can be weakened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary unit 500 is displaced up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the direction of displacement of the rotation unit 500 may be displacement in the front-rear direction, displacement in the left-right direction, or displacement in an oblique direction.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the guide tubular portion 423 is inserted only in the front side columnar member 431 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the guide tubular portion 423 may be omitted, or the guide tubular portion 423 may be provided on both of the pair of columnar members 431.

In this case, the arrangement manner of the guide tubular portion 423 may be different for each of the composite operation units 402 arranged in the left and right four sets. For example, when the rotary unit 500 is driven in association with the number of reserved balls, the combined operation unit 402 corresponding to the smaller number of reserved balls is operated more frequently than the combined operation unit 402 corresponding to the larger number of reserved balls. It is assumed that the frequency of operation increases, and thus the deterioration is likely to occur early.

Therefore, only in the combined operation unit 402 (the combined operation unit 402 at the left end) corresponding to the smallest number of reserved balls, the guide tubular portion 423 is provided on both of the pair of columnar members 431, and the vertical displacement resistance of the rotation unit 500 is reduced. In order to reduce the number, the guide cylinder portion 423 may be arranged only on the front side columnar member 431 in the other complex operation unit 402. As a result, the difference between the useful life of the leftmost combined operation unit 402 and the useful lives of the other combined operation units 402 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the front and rear surfaces of the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b are formed in a flat shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curved surface shape. Moreover, although the case where the intersecting position of the extension line 517x is biased to the right side with respect to the center of the deformed hole 517 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intersecting position of the extension line 517x may be arranged at the center of the irregular hole 517.

In the first embodiment, the case where the positioning pin 516c is arranged in the range between the pair of extension lines 517x has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the positioning pin 516c may be arranged outside the range between the pair of extension lines 517x (for example, on the left side of the fastening portion 516b). In this case, the arrangement width of the electric wiring DK1 can be secured.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fastening portions 517a of the guide member 516 are separately arranged has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the irregular holes 517 may be connected and arranged in a manner of dividing. In this case, when there are a plurality of electric wirings passing through the odd-shaped hole 517, they can be supported by separate openings. Thereby, for example, it is possible to easily guide the wiring arranged on the upper side through the deformed hole 517 in both left and right directions of the guide member 516.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 517a projects inward of the deformed hole 517 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b may be formed from a true circular opening in which the fastening portion 517a is omitted, and the fastening portion may be arranged outside the opening. In this case, since the passage area of the electric wiring DK1 can be increased, the upper limit value of the total cross-sectional area of the electric wiring DK1 can be increased.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is formed up to an intermediate position in the depth direction of the odd-shaped hole 517 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b may be formed in the same shape as the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b so as to penetrate therethrough.

In the first embodiment described above, the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b as the fan-shaped recessed portion is formed in the deformed hole 517, but the shape of the recessed portion is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front and rear walls may be substantially rectangular recesses extending parallel to the left-right direction. In this case, it is possible to reduce the load received by the electric wiring DK1 arranged in the recessed portion.

Further, in this case, when the member connected to the electric wiring DK1 is displaced in the left-right direction, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 in the left-right direction due to the displacement can be guided by the recessed portion. That is, since the concave portion can guide the displacement of the electric wiring DK1, the load applied to the electric wiring DK1 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped adjusting portion 517b is formed in a single piece has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fan-shaped adjusting units 517b can be set arbitrarily, and may be two, three, or four.

In the first embodiment, the detected portion 577 has been described as having a shape in which the annular protruding portion is divided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the projecting base end side of the detected part 577 may have a shape that is not divided. In this case, since the rigidity of the detected part 577 can be improved, the rigidity of the rotating right lid part 570 can be improved, and as a result, the rigidity of the rotating body 560 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 includes the drive motor 541 and the rotating portion (the rotating body 560, the rotating left plate 550, the motor gear 542 meshed with the rotating left plate 550, and the driven plate 575 of the rotating right lid portion 570. ), but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the drive motor 541 and the rotating portion may be in contact with the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is supported by the right fixed bush 522, and the driven plate 575 fixed to the rotating body 560 is supported by the posture fixing bush 571, so that the electric wiring DK1 and the rotating body 560 are made of metal. Although the case where the member is not directly supported by the member has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the electric wiring DK1 and the rotating body 560 may be directly supported by the metal member (for example, the U-shaped metal plate 511).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the front lid member 762 is formed of an annular member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ring may be formed of a C-shaped member that is divided in the middle.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the displacement base member 720 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement base member 720 may be rotatably supported. In this case, the front cover member 762 can be driven by the displacement of the electric wiring DK3 by the rotation of the front cover member 762.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the shaft-supported means 760 changes its posture and the displacement base member 720 that is displaced up and down does not change its posture, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement base member 720 and the shaft-supported means 760 may be integrally configured, and both the displacement base member 720 and the shaft-supported means 760 may be capable of changing their postures.

In the first embodiment described above, the case in which the postures of the left and right supported shafts 760 change has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left-side supported means 760L guided by the electrical wiring DK2 may change its posture, while the right-side supported means 760R may not change its posture. Even in this case, the tensile load applied to the electric wiring DK2 can be reduced.

In this case, a driving device that generates a driving force for changing the attitude of the pivotally supported means 760R may be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes depending on whether the attitude of the pivotally supported means 760R changes as the displacement base member 720 moves up and down, or when the attitude of the pivotally supported means 760 is maintained.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the shaft-supported means 760 changes its posture with respect to the displacement base member 720 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a slide member that relatively slides in the opposite direction to the vertical displacement of the displacement base member 720 may be connected to the displacement base member 720, and the electrical wiring DK2 may be connected to the slide member. Even in this case, as compared with the case where the electric wiring DK2 is connected to the displacement base member 720, the displacement amount of the connection end portion of the electric wiring DK2 when the displacement base member 720 is displaced up and down by the same distance is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is guided through the opening 714a arranged on the left side of the fixed base member 701 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electric wire DK2 passing through the left opening 714a may be connected to the left supported means 760L, and the electric wire passing through the right opening 714a may be connected to the right supported means 760R. .. In this case, electricity can be supplied to the right pivotally supported means 760R without going through the rendering means 780.

Further, since the guide portion 765 is also formed on the right shaft-supported means 760R, the configurations of the shaft-supported means 760L and 760R can be easily designed symmetrically in terms of function. Further, when the electric wiring is not passed through the right opening 714a, the formation of the right opening 714a may be omitted. As a result, the rigidity of the right tubular protruding portion 714 can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the shaft-supported means 760 is supported by the end portion in the longitudinal direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be supported near the central portion instead of the end portion, or may be supported at other portions.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the electric wirings DK1, DK2, DK3 are composed of one or a plurality of harnesses having a plurality of electric wires has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by one or a plurality of flat cables. In this case, by making the direction in which the electric wires DK1, DK2, DK3 can be displaced coincide with the direction in which the flat cable becomes thin (thickness direction), the load at the time of displacement of the flat cable can be reduced.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the detected portion 745a is formed at one location on the terminal gear 745 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detected portions 745a may be formed at a plurality of locations (a plurality of angular positions can be detected). Thus, for example, different stop positions are detected, namely, a drive stop position when controlling the rotating arm member 743 to rise to the end position and a drive stop position when controlling to perform a reciprocating lifting operation using its own weight. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the first operation unit 400 is configured to stand by at the lower position and be displaced upward, and the second operation unit 700 is configured to be standby at the upper position and displaced downward is described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of each unit may be turned upside down, or the units may be laterally displaced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the spring cover SC1 is fixed has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spring cover SC1 may be formed in a bellows shape and configured to be vertically displaceable. In this case, by connecting the lower end of the spring cover SC1 to the upper end of the rendering means 780, the spring cover SC1 can be vertically expanded and contracted while the coil spring SP1 is hidden by the spring cover SC1. For example, by drawing a decorative pattern on the front surface of the spring cover SC1, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the appearance of the decorative pattern as the spring cover SC1 expands and contracts.

In the second embodiment, the case where the dedicated solenoid 2086d for driving the decoration member 2086f is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the decoration member 2086f is designed to be able to contact the upper end of the rendering unit 780 and a load is applied to the decoration member 2086f along with the displacement of the rendering unit 780, the decoration member 2086f may be displaced. good. In this case, the drive motor 731 is also used as a device for generating a driving force for displacing the decorative member 2086f, so that a dedicated drive device (corresponding to the solenoid 2086d) can be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, the case where the decorative member 2086f is rotationally displaced along the horizontal rotation axis has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the base plate 60 may be configured to slide along the front surface direction (vertical and horizontal directions), the front-back direction, or a combination thereof. It may be configured as follows.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the connection to the rotating arm member 3743 is released and the displacement base member 3720 is placed at the assembly preparation position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement base member 3720 may be arranged at the assembly preparation position by enlarging the elongated opening 723 or the transmission hole 744.

In the third embodiment, the case where the roller member 3729 is configured to be capable of correcting the posture change of the displacement base member 3720 by contacting the left and right extending portions SC3c has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement base member 3720 may be decelerated by contact between the roller member 3729 and the left and right extending portions SC3c. In addition, a flexible cushion member may be provided on the lower side of the left and right extending portions SC3c to reduce the impact at the time of contact.

In the third embodiment, the case where the electric wiring DK2 is connected after the roller member 3729 is engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b of the spring cover SC3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the roller member 3729 may be engaged with the guide recessed portion SC3b of the spring cover SC3 in a state where the connection of the electric wiring DK2 is completed.

In this case, the distance between the fixing shape portion 718 that fixes the electric wiring DK2 and the path portion 765b becomes the longest, and an extra load may be applied to the electric wiring DK2. The unit 5718 may be used. That is, by disposing the fixing shape portion 5718 at the lower position of the left and right upper stoppers 5717 during assembly, the distance between the fixing positions of the electric wiring DK2 can be shortened.

In the third embodiment, the case where the production means 780 is assembled after the small-diameter collar C3 is fastened and fixed (after the displacement base member 3720 and the rotating arm member 3748 are connected) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a member that connects the displacement base member 3720 and the rotating arm member 3748 is configured to be assembled by screwing a fastening screw from the back side, so that the displacement base member 3720 is assembled after the production means 780 is assembled. And the pivot arm member 3748 can be connected.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the guide recessed portion SC3b is formed along the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wavy shape extending along the vertical direction. In this case, an effect of displacing the displacement base member 3720 in the left-right direction can be executed as the displacement base member 3720 is vertically displaced. In this case, it is preferable to omit the metal slide rail 711.

The ball guide portion 4164b described in the fourth embodiment may be arranged at a position upstream of the half-forming portion 163a of the second flow path member 163 described in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game spheres bridged from the first flow path member 162 to the second flow path member 163 from staying.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is displaced up and down in conjunction with the left and right upper stoppers 5717 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixing shape portion 5718 may be vertically displaced by itself. In this case, it is not necessary to take measures against the positional deviation of the left and right upper stoppers 5717.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is controlled to be displaced upward after the path portion 765b has passed the left and right positions of the fixing shape portion 5718 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the fixing shape portion 5718 may be controlled to be upwardly displaced at the timing when the degree of relaxation of the electric wiring DK2 is maximum (the timing when the path portion 765b is arranged at the left and right positions of the fixing shape portion 5718). .. In this case, the upward load applied to the electric wiring DK2 can be generated from an early stage, so that the upward load can be gently applied to the electric wiring DK2.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the fixing shape portion 5718 is displaced upward by the driving force of the solenoid SOL51 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by a driving force (driving force of the driving motor 731) transmitted via a transmission unit such as a gear that interlocks with the displacement of another member (for example, the rotating arm member 743) that is displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 731. It may be configured to be displaced.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the timing at which the fixing shape portion 5718 is displaced up and down is controlled to match the timing at which the load applied to the electric wiring DK2 is likely to become excessive has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the solenoid SOL51 may be configured to always interlock with the drive period of the drive motor 731.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Technical idea to reduce displacement of electric wiring by displacement of movable accessory>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable and an electric wiring connected to the displacement means, a section in which the displacement means is displaced includes a section in which the load applied to the electric wiring is reduced. A game machine A1 characterized by.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, by arranging the electric wiring guided by the displacing means along auxiliary means connected to the displacing means and configured to be displaceable, the electric wiring is excessively burdened when the displacing means is displaced. There is a gaming machine that is configured to suppress such a situation (for example, see JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the number of members arranged in a portion where the player cannot see increases because an auxiliary means that is not originally visible to the player is required.

Further, when the auxiliary means is damaged, the load on the electric wiring cannot be suppressed, so that it is necessary to secure the strength of the auxiliary means, and the product cost is likely to increase accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, by displacing the displacement means so as to reduce the load applied to the electric wiring, the displacement amount itself of the electric wiring is reduced or the excessive displacement of the electric wiring is suppressed so that the electric wiring is reduced. It is possible to eliminate the need for a separate auxiliary means while preventing the exposure of the person.

It should be noted that the specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, a binding band capable of temporarily fixing the electric wiring may be used, or a cover or tube made of a silicone resin surrounding the electric wiring may be used.

Further, the mode of reducing the load related to the electric wiring is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which (at least a part of) the displacement of the electric wiring is reduced or a mode in which (at least a part) of the electrical wiring is increased may be adopted.

In the gaming machine A1, the electric wiring is positioned at a predetermined portion outside the displacement means, the displacement means includes a guide portion for guiding the electric wiring, and the distance between the guide portion and the predetermined portion. The game machine A2 is configured to be displaceable so as to reduce the change of

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the degree of freedom of the displacement mode of the displacement means can be improved as compared with the case where the entire displacement means is displaced so as to reduce the displacement of the electric wiring. ..

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, drive means for generating a drive force and transmission means configured to transmit the drive force of the drive means toward the displacement means are provided, and the electric wiring connects the displacement means. As a reference, the game machine A3 is arranged on the side opposite to the transmission means side.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the electric wiring is not arranged between the displacement means and the transmission means, and it is not necessary to provide the transmission means with a structure for holding the electric wiring. Therefore, the distance between the displacement means and the transmission means can be narrowed, and the space on the front side of the displacement means can be secured.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the displacing means can be increased, so that the displacing means is effectively used as a wiring hiding with a three-dimensional design and a high production effect, rather than a simple wiring hiding with a low design. You can

The gaming machine A3 is provided with an intermediate means displaceably supported by the transmission means, the intermediate means displaceably supports the displacement means, and the displacement of the displacement means is at least in the direction of displacement of the intermediate means. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it includes displacement in a manner toward the opposite side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, if the structure is such that the electric wiring is hidden on one side of the displacing means, and the other side of the displacing means is supported by the intermediate means, it is intermediate depending on design. The degree of freedom in selecting the displacement amount of the means can be improved. In other words, the displacement amount when the intermediate means is displaced in the direction away from the electric wiring can be offset by the displacement of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine A4, the transmission means includes a sudden stop means for suddenly stopping the intermediate means after high-speed displacement, the gaming machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, since the intermediate means can be stopped suddenly, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the intermediate means can be generated by utilizing the inertia of the displacement means.

Further, by this, even when the intermediate means is suddenly stopped, it is necessary that the electric wiring flows by inertia in the direction in which the intermediate means is displaced before the sudden stop of the intermediate means. It can be suppressed by (fishing). Thereby, the displacement of the electric wiring can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the electric wiring is guided to the displacing means on the side where the transmission means is arranged with reference to the displacement direction of the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the electric wiring can be guided to the displacing means on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path based on the displacement direction of the intermediate means. It is possible to easily suppress the amount of displacement of the electric wiring even when is displaced in an unexpected displacement manner (even when malfunctioning).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the displacement means includes a guide portion for guiding the electric wiring, a base member having the guide portion, and a substrate arranged on the base member. The game machine A7 is characterized in that the part is arranged so as not to hide the substrate in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring guided by the guide portion from interfering with the effect of the board.

<Technical idea that the motor is arranged inside the rotating means>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating means configured to be rotatable about a predetermined axis and a driving means generating a driving force for rotating the rotating means, a detecting means configured to detect a position of the rotating means is provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the detecting means is arranged inside the rotating means in the first direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a plurality of rotating means and a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the plurality of rotating means (for example, see JP 2007-130261A). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although some space saving is achieved by rotating the plurality of rotating means by the driving force generated from the single driving means, it is more than the outer edge of the rotating means in the front view. Since the drive unit and the detection unit are arranged outside, a separate shield unit for shielding them is required, and there is a problem that the device including the rotation unit becomes large in the first direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the detecting means is arranged inside the rotating means in the first direction, the detecting means can be hidden by the rotating means, so that only the detecting means is shielded. It is possible to eliminate the need for a separate shielding part, and to reduce the size of the device.

Further, since it is possible to provide the detection means corresponding to each rotation means while avoiding an increase in size in the first direction, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in production.

Further, since the detecting means is provided inside the rotating means when viewed in the first direction, the degree of freedom of the effect produced by rotating or stopping the rotating means can be improved while keeping the device compact. ..

The gaming machine B1 is provided with supporting means for rotatably supporting the rotating means, and the supporting means supports the driving means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, it is possible to reduce the number of members by using the supporting means for supporting the rotating means also as the supporting means for the driving means.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving means is housed inside the rotating means, and the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to save space on the outside of the rotating means.

The gaming machine B4 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, wherein the detecting means is configured to detect a change in the rotational direction position of the rotating means, and is arranged inside the rotating means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the visibility of the outside of the rotating means is improved as compared with the case where the detecting means is arranged outside the rotating means. can do.

The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the detecting means is arranged on a downstream side of a transmission path of a driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in comparison with the case where the detection means is arranged on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path, the driving force is transmitted in the middle of the transmission path. When an abnormality occurs (for example, when the rotating means is ruptured and the driving force is transmitted only to the upstream side), the detection means can easily detect the occurrence of the abnormality at an early stage.

In this case, when the detection means is arranged at the downstream end of the transmission path of the driving force, it is possible to detect the abnormality early even if the abnormality occurs at any position of the transmission path. it can.

It should be noted that the mode of abnormality is not limited in any way. For example, the rotating body configured by connecting the divided bodies may be broken in the middle to interrupt the transmission of the driving force, or the gear may be damaged in the gear or the mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted by the frictional force. It may be a mode in which friction does not occur, or a mode in which the drive means as the upper end of the drive force transmission path fails.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the detection means includes a detection device having a detection part and a detection part whose displacement is detected by the detection part of the detection device, and the rotating means includes the detection part. A gaming machine B6 characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the detection device can be fixed, so that electric wiring or the like connected to the detection device can be easily configured.

Further, by directly detecting the displacement of the rotating means, it is possible to reduce the detection error as compared with the case of indirectly detecting the displacement.

In the gaming machine B6, the detected portion is formed as a protruding portion protruding inward of the rotating means along the rotation direction of the rotating means, and a dividing portion formed as a concave portion dividing the protruding portion. And the projecting portion is longer than the dividing portion.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, it is possible to increase the degree of rigidity enhancement of the rotating means by the protruding portion.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, an electric wire connected to the drive means and a limiting means for limiting the arrangement of the electric wire are provided, and the electric wire is connected to the drive means. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that the limiting means is configured to avoid contact of the connecting portion with the driving means or the rotating means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the limiting means can improve the durability of the electric wiring. That is, by avoiding contact between the drive means and the connecting portion of the electric wiring, deterioration or disconnection of the electric wiring due to heat generation from the drive means can be suppressed, and contact between the rotating means and the connecting portion of the electric wiring can be prevented. By avoiding this, deterioration of the electric wiring and disconnection due to friction can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, a supporting means for rotatably supporting the rotating means and an electric wiring connected to the driving means are provided, and the supporting means includes a first supporting member made of metal, A game machine B9 comprising a second support member made of resin, wherein at least one of the rotating means and the electric wiring is supported by the first support member via the second support member.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the first supporting member stably holds the rotating means and the driving means in opposition to the weight of the rotating means and the electric wiring. It is possible to avoid early wear of the rotating means and early breakage of the electrical wiring, as compared with the case where the rotating means is directly supported by the first supporting means.

In the gaming machine B9, the first supporting member is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting a rotation axis of the rotating means.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, it is possible to perform a movable effect of displacing the rotation shaft of the rotating means while stabilizing the rotation of the rotating means.

<Structural technical idea of odd-shaped wiring through>
A gaming machine provided with a wiring supporting means having an opening through which electric wiring is inserted, wherein the gaming machine C1 is provided with a limiting means for limiting movement of the electrical wiring inserted through the opening.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that electric wiring is inserted into a tubular member having an opening (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the opening portion is formed in a size that allows the connector of the electric wiring to be inserted therethrough, and the position of the electric wiring having a diameter smaller than the connector is not fixed in the opening portion. There is a problem that the electric wiring position in the state may not be uniform for each product.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by restricting the movement of the electric wiring by means such as dividing the opening into a plurality of sections by the limiting means, the position of the electric wiring within the opening can be easily determined. Therefore, the positions of the electric wiring can be made uniform.

It should be noted that the mode in which the positions of the electric wiring are uniform is not limited at all. For example, the relative position with respect to a predetermined member may be within a predetermined reference for each product, or when the electrical wiring is formed of a bundle, the tendency that the bundle is scattered (collected) tends to be a product. It may be the same for each.

Further, the shape of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be a circular opening, a predetermined number of rectangular openings (triangle or quadrangle), or any other complicated shape (for example, a star shape).

In the gaming machine C1, the limiting means is provided with a plurality of projecting portions that project to the inside of the opening, and the electric wiring can be arranged between the plurality of projecting portions. Gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the work of inserting the electrical wiring into the opening portion is facilitated as compared with the case where a partition is provided in the opening portion and the opening portion is divided into a plurality of pieces. be able to.

In the gaming machine C2, the wiring supporting means includes a fixing portion fixed to the guiding means for guiding the electric wiring, and the fixing portion is arranged on the projecting portion. C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the projecting portion can also be used for fixing the guide means. Accordingly, when fixing the wiring support means to the guide means, it is possible to avoid sandwiching the electric wiring between the wiring support means and the guide means.

It should be noted that the mode of the guiding means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the guide means may be configured as a part of the plate-shaped member or a columnar member (columnar portion).

In the gaming machine C3, the guide means is formed thick along the shape of the projecting portion in the thickness direction of the wiring support means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the guide means is formed to be thick along the shape of the overhang portion, so that the guide route of the electric wiring arranged between the overhang portions is It is possible to secure high rigidity of the wiring supporting means while ensuring the rigidity.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the guiding means includes a columnar portion that extends in a columnar shape in the thickness direction of the overhang portion, the gaming machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, the columnar portion loosely restricts the arrangement of the electric wiring, so that the degree of change in the mode (for example, the degree of looseness) of the electric wiring arranged between the guide means and the wiring supporting means is changed. Can be gradual (gradual).

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the wiring support means includes a thickness forming portion that is formed to have a thickness on an outer peripheral side from a position where the protruding portion is not provided. ..

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the wall thickness forming portion is reinforced even when the electric wiring is concentrated in a place where the projecting portion is not provided. By playing a role, it is possible to prevent the wiring supporting means from being cracked or damaged.

Further, when the wiring supporting means is supported from the outer peripheral side by a harder member (for example, a metal member), the wall thickness forming portion can be largely deformed as compared with other portions (thin portions). Therefore, by disposing the thickness forming portion at a location where the electric wiring is concentrated, it is possible to easily avoid disconnection of the electric wiring.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the wiring supporting means includes a first wiring supporting means and a second wiring supporting means laminated on the first wiring supporting means, and the wiring supporting means includes A game machine C7, wherein the first open part, which is the open part, and the second open part, which is the open part of the second wiring supporting means, have different shapes.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the mode of electric wiring in the first open part (for example, the degree of separation) and the mode of electric wiring in the second open part are provided. By making them different, the mode of electric wiring can be changed stepwise.

Thereby, it is possible to easily deal with the switching of the mode required for the electric wiring. For example, when switching is performed between a mode in which the electric wiring requires a predetermined stable displacement (displacement within a limited range) and a mode in which the displacement is not required but position stability is required in a uniformly dispersed state. In addition, the mode of electric wiring can be changed stepwise.

The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the wiring supporting means includes a recessed portion that is recessed wider than a width of an electric wire forming the electric wiring.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to set a limit to the extent that the electric wires are scattered, so that the electric wiring is prevented from interfering with other configurations. It is possible to easily arrange the electric wiring.

<Technical idea to suitably crawl the electric wiring on the guide route>
A gaming machine D1 comprising: a constituent means that constitutes a guide path capable of guiding the electric wiring, and the constituent means is configured so that the electric wiring can be suitably arranged on the guide path.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a temporary fastening portion for temporarily fastening electrical wiring to a displacement member (for example, see JP2012-157474A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the electric wiring can be arranged along the displacement member, when the electric wiring is composed of a plurality of electric wires, it does not refer to the arrangement of the electric wires. There is a problem that there is room for improvement when applied to the actual usage state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the constituent means that configures the guide route of the electric wiring is configured so that the electric wiring can be suitably arranged, the quality of the electric wiring can be maintained in a high state.

In addition, the aspect which arrange|positions electric wiring suitably is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of electric wires may be bundled in advance in a position before the guide route becomes thin, or a plurality of electric wires may be separated in advance in a position in which the opening of the guide route becomes thin, so that the electric wiring from the guide route is reduced. The load applied to the vehicle may be reduced, or the electric wiring may be fixed to the guide route in a predetermined section. In the former case, it is easy to prevent the electric wiring from being broken, and in the latter case, it is possible to easily identify the location where the electric wiring is broken, so that it is possible to easily deal with the electric wiring.

In the gaming machine D1, the guiding route includes a reducing portion that locally reduces the width in a predetermined direction, and has a plurality of sectional shapes.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the reduction portion is provided as a location where the load to which the electrical wiring is applied is relatively large, so that it is easy to predict the location of the disconnection when the electrical wiring is disconnected. Become. As a result, the time required for maintenance of the electric wiring can be shortened.

In the gaming machine D2, the electric wiring arranged in the reduction unit is configured to have a short width in a first direction view, and the constituent means is provided at a position where the electric wiring is guided to the reduction unit. A gaming machine D3, which is provided with a wiring adjusting unit configured to be able to reduce a width of the wiring as viewed in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, by shortening the width of the electric wiring in the first direction, it is possible to avoid limiting the structure of other accessory to the electric wiring. it can. Furthermore, if the width of the electric wiring is forcibly shortened, an excessive load may be applied to the electric wiring, which may cause the electric wiring to be crushed or break early. By adjusting the state of the electric wiring by the wiring adjusting unit before the operation, the load applied to the electric wiring can be reduced. As a result, the frequency of maintenance can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D3, the wiring adjusting means is provided with a curved surface on which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the electric wiring side, and the circumferential direction of the curved surface is arranged along the direction in which the electric wires are arranged. A gaming machine D4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, it is possible to equalize the loads given to the plurality of electric wires. That is, compared with the case where the flat surface is arranged to face a plurality of electric wires, the electric wires placed side by side have the same load applied to the electric wires regardless of whether the electric wires are closer to the center side or closer to the outer side. can do.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the wiring adjusting means includes a recessed portion that is recessed wider than a width of an electric wire forming the electric wiring.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3 or D4, it is possible to set a limit to the extent that the electric wires are scattered, so that the electric wiring can be prevented from interfering with other configurations. The arrangement of electric wiring can be facilitated.

The gaming machine D6 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, which is provided with a fixing member (design member) for fixing the electric wiring.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, abrasion of the electric wiring can be prevented by preventing internal displacement of the electric wiring. It is possible to prevent disconnection of electric wiring without using a tool.

Note that the fixing mode is not limited at all. For example, the configuration means and the electrical wiring may be fixed by a liquid member such as glue, or a tape (a tape having an adhesive action) coated with a member having an adhesive action may be attached to the component member and the electrical wiring. Alternatively, the electric wiring may be prevented from being displaced by a load generated when the electric wiring is sandwiched between the constituent means and the fixing member.

In the gaming machine D6, an opening is formed in the fixing member, and the electric wiring can be reached through the opening.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the arrangement of the electric wiring can be adjusted through the opening from the side opposite to the electric wiring with respect to the fixing member, so that the electric wiring is fixed in the work of fixing the electric wiring with the fixing member. It is possible to easily avoid arranging the wiring in a wrong position, and it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from being damaged during the work.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the guide path includes a receiving portion configured to receive the electric wiring, and an entering portion configured to enter the receiving portion, and the electric wiring is A gaming machine D8, which is supported by the entry portion.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring will be sandwiched between the recessed portion and the entry portion.

<Technical ideas to improve production effects by using blind spots>
A game that is provided with a predetermined region that is visible in the first direction and through which a game ball can pass, and a predetermined unit that changes a visual aspect of the predetermined region in the first direction. Machine E1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an overhanging disposition portion which is disposed so as to project on the front side of the game board (for example, see JP-A-2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the overhanging arrangement portion blocks the player's line of sight above the center of the game board in the vertical direction, so the effect in the portion hidden by the overhanging arrangement portion There is a problem in that the effect tends to be low.

In other words, it is possible to create individuality for each gaming machine by drawing patterns and figures within the limited area of the gaming board, but at locations that may be hidden by the overhanging arrangement part. If it is clear that the player cannot easily see the pattern or figure even if it is drawn, it is possible to avoid drawing the pattern or figure at a position that may be hidden by the overhang arrangement section. Therefore, as a result, the area where a pattern or figure can be drawn on the game board is further narrowed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in decorating the game board is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the predetermined area is adopted not as a location for drawing a figure or a pattern but as a path for a light or the like, and a visibility mode can be changed by a predetermined means, so that a predetermined area can be obtained. As a result of effectively utilizing the area and increasing the degree of freedom in decorating the game board, the effect of the game board can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E1, a game board configured to allow a game ball to flow down is provided on the front side, and the game board is provided with an opening formed so as to overlap at least a part of the predetermined area. Amusement machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, light emitted from the rear side position of the gaming board toward the front side toward the gaming board is passed through a part of the opening overlapping the predetermined area to the front side. Can be irradiated. Therefore, since it is possible to illuminate the vicinity of the predetermined area, which tends to give a dark impression, with light, it is possible to improve the effect of the vicinity of the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine E2, the predetermined means constitutes a rolling surface of a gaming ball, the gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the light and the game ball are visually recognized in an overlapping manner, so that it is possible to easily determine the flow down of the game ball. As a result, compared to the case where the player does not notice the abnormal launch when the player does not reach the winning opening, the abnormal launch of the playing ball can be seen by looking at the upstream side of the downflow route from the winning opening ( For example, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the game ball is delayed in launch due to a failure of the launching device or a ball clogging. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a problem in the game (for example, a so-called "puncture in a one-two mixer").

In the gaming machine E3, the opening is configured to be linearly visible along the predetermined means, and the gaming machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the predetermined area can be effectively utilized to the maximum extent, and it is possible to avoid forming an opening even in a portion not hidden by the predetermined means.

In the gaming machine E3 or E4, the predetermined means rolls when the game ball rolls down the left side of the game area, and the first predetermined means rolls when the game ball flows down the right side of the game area. A gaming machine E5 comprising a second predetermined means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3 or E4, by controlling which of the predetermined regions of the first predetermined means or the second predetermined means allows the light to be visually recognized, the sphere firing mode Can be notified.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 is provided with a displacement member that passes through the predetermined region and is displaced to the front side.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, it is possible to make it easy for the player to determine the change in the predetermined area.

<Technical idea to inform game efficiency by decelerating the game ball>
A game ball is configured to be capable of abutting, and is provided with a flow-down means that constitutes a flow-down path of the abutting game ball, and the flow-down means is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the game area side. Gaming machine F1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an inner rail member constitutes a rolling surface of a game ball that spills from a general winning opening on the left side of the game area (for example, see JP 2011-229686 A). .. The game ball that has reached the inner rail member on the left side of the game area is a game ball that has been determined to flow down to the outlet (becomes a ball upon death), and some of these game balls are the game being played. This is one of the effective data for achieving the winning efficiency in the game area of the machine. Therefore, by paying attention to the left side portion of the game area, it is possible to give the player a predetermined profit. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to retain the game ball because the flow down of the game ball is too smooth, and it is difficult to focus on the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the flow-down means is provided with the protruding portion, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means can be decelerated. This makes it easier to hold the game ball on the left side of the game area, and allows the left side of the game area to be focused.

In the gaming machine F1, the projecting portion is provided on the downstream side of the landing range with which the game ball comes into contact when landing on the flow-down means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to avoid instability of the bouncing of the gaming ball after the gaming ball has landed on the downflow means, and the gaming ball is downflow means. It is possible to prevent the projecting portion from being damaged by the impact when the vehicle collides with.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the protrusion is compared with a repulsive force generated in a direction of pushing back the game ball approaching from the upstream side of the flow-down means, and a game ball approaching from the downstream side of the flow-down means. A gaming machine F3, which is configured such that a repulsive force generated in a pushing-back direction is larger than that of the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball from stopping on the downflow means, and the gaming ball goes over the projecting portion to the downflow means. Can be prevented from climbing along.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion and a second projecting portion provided upstream of the flow-down means with respect to the first projecting portion. A gaming machine F4, wherein a projecting aspect of the first projecting portion is different from a projecting aspect of the second projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the degree of staying (deceleration) of the game ball in the first protruding portion and the staying of the game ball in the second protruding portion ( The degree of deceleration can be varied.

It should be noted that the protruding configuration is not limited at all. For example, it may be the shape of the protruding portion, the protruding length or the protruding width, or the protruding interval when a plurality of protruding portions are formed.

For example, when the projecting length is adopted as the projecting aspect, if the projecting length of the second projecting portion is made longer than the projecting length of the first projecting portion, it flows down on the downflow means. It is possible to make the game ball hard to set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing into the out-out port (collectively), so that it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring at the out-out port.

On the contrary, if the projecting length of the second projecting portion is made shorter than the projecting length of the first projecting portion, the game ball flowing down on the flow-down means can be easily solidified. As a result, it is possible to easily cause a lump of the game balls when the game balls reach the flow-down means with high frequency, and thus it is possible to easily attract the attention of the player who wants to obtain information on the winning efficiency. ..

The gaming machine F5 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, wherein the flow-down means includes a diffusing portion having a diffusing shape formed on a front end portion.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the front end portion of the flow-down means can be surface-emitted.

In the gaming machine F5, the wall thickness of the projecting portion is configured to be the same as the wall thickness of the flow-down means, and the diffusing portion overhangs in a direction opposite to the projecting direction from the front end of the projecting portion. A gaming machine F6 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F5, the wall thickness of the protruding portion is equal to the wall thickness of the flow-down means. It can be improved compared to the case where the thickness changes. In addition, since the diffusing portion includes the projecting portion, it is possible to secure a large area where light is diffused on the front side of the projecting portion, so that attention to the projecting portion can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a mode in which a game ball is provided above the projecting portion and configured to allow a game ball to enter the ball and is visually recognized through the projecting portion is front. A gaming machine F7, which is configured so as to be changeable depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the entry ball port.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, it is possible to recognize the entry into the entry opening by visually recognizing the flow-down means. As a result, the attention to the flow-down means can be increased.

In the game machine F7, a reflecting means is provided between the projecting portion and the ball entrance, and the reflecting means is provided with at least a part of the light reflected from the projecting portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured so that it can enter the mouth.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, the entry port can be projected on the projecting portion, so that a player who pays attention to the projecting portion can enter the entry port It is possible to grasp the existence.

Also, for a player who pays attention to the protruding portion, a game ball that rolls in the upper part of the flow-down means (a game ball that actually exists) and a game ball that enters the ball entrance, and the action of the reflecting means. With this, it is possible to visually recognize the game balls that can be visually recognized (game balls that are reflected), so that the player can feel as if many game balls are gathered in one place.

<One side of the flow path that is formed by connecting the members in a row is formed by one member>
In a gaming machine provided with a component member arranged opposite to a flow-down region in which a game ball is allowed to flow down, a first component member constituting one side face of a first flow-down region and the other side face of the first flow-down region are constituted. A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising a second constituent member and a third constituent member, the third constituent member constituting a part of the second flow-down area constituted by the first constituent member.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a long flow path is formed by arranging a plurality of pairs of flow path forming members that form a flow path in series (for example, JP-A-2015-159997). (See the official gazette). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the number of members constituting the flow path increases and the management of parts becomes difficult.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first constituent member forming the flow path with the second constituent member can be used also as the member forming the flow path with the third constituent member, and the flow path is constituted. Since the number of members can be reduced, parts management can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine G1, one of the constituent members that configures at least a part of the one side surface of the flow-down area includes a disposition portion, and the other of the constituents that configures at least a part of the other side surface of the flow-down area. The game machine G2, wherein the member is provided with a positioning portion that is positioned by contacting the arrangement portion.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the components can be aligned with each other by the contact between the disposing portion and the positioning portion, so that many fastening and fixing portions are required for the positioning. It is possible to eliminate the need for disposing.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is provided with adjusting means for adjusting the arrangement of the second constituent member or the third constituent member with respect to the first constituent member.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second constituent member or the third constituent member can be easily arranged with respect to the first constituent member.

The adjusting means may be formed integrally with the second component member or the third component member, or may be configured as an individual member different from any of the first component member, the second component member, and the third component member. May be.

In the gaming machine G3, the adjusting means is configured to be independently displaceable from any of the first constituent member, the second constituent member, and the third constituent member.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the degree of freedom in adjusting the adjusting means can be improved.

In the gaming machine G4, the adjusting means is configured so as not to affect the shape of the flow-down area even if the arrangement is changed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, only the first constituent member, the second constituent member, and the third constituent member need to be arranged while confirming that the ball can flow down. Since the arrangement of the adjusting means can be set independently of the possibility of the ball flowing down, the number of assembling steps can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G5, the first component member includes a positioning recess portion that is recessed from the flow-down region side, and the adjusting unit is disposed in the positioning recess portion, and the first configuration member is provided. A gaming machine G6, wherein a surface on the side of the flow-down area is formed on a surface on which the one side surface of the member is formed.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G5, it is possible to prevent the shape of the downflow region from changing due to the disposition of the adjustment means while configuring one side surface of the downflow region by the adjustment means. it can.

In the gaming machine G6, the adjusting means is chamfered at a corner on the side opposite to the flow-down direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G6, the surface of the adjusting means facing the downflow direction of the game ball is chamfered, so that the adjusting means is the first component member due to a dimensional error. Even if it projects to the side of the flow-down area from the side surface, the collision point with the game ball can be configured by the surface. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjusting means will be damaged due to the collision with the game ball, and also to reduce the downflow resistance of the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the gaming machine G8, wherein the second constituent member and the third constituent member are connected.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the arrangement of the third constituent member with respect to the second constituent member. The part connected to the third component can be configured smoothly.

<Technical idea of disposing the spring near the center of the displacement member>
In a gaming machine including a displacement means configured to be displaceable, a guide means configured to guide a displacement of the displacement means, and a biasing means for biasing the displacement means, a gaming machine is provided with a front surface of the biasing means. And a shielding means disposed so as to block at least a part of the line of sight to the urging means, the urging means being disposed between the displacement means and the guide means along a predetermined direction. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable, a guide rail for guiding the displacement of the movable accessory, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force for assisting the displacement of the movable accessory. There is a gaming machine provided with the urging means on the opposite side (rear side) of the movable accessory with the guide rail interposed therebetween (see, for example, JP-A-2016-054856). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of efficiently generating the biasing force because the front-rear distance between the center of gravity of the movable accessory and the position where the biasing force is generated is long. It was

On the other hand, if the position of the biasing means is moved to the front side in order to bring the biasing means closer to the center of gravity of the movable accessory, the biasing means may be seen by the player, and the effect of production may be reduced. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the biasing means can be efficiently generated by bringing the biasing means closer to the displacement means, and the blocking means prevents the biasing means from being visually recognized by the player. can do.

In the gaming machine H1, the shielding means is arranged on the back side of the displacing means, the gaming machine H2.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being hidden by the shielding means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the shielding means is configured so as to be able to enter the inside of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, it is possible to prevent the figure or the pattern drawn outside the displacement means from becoming invisible due to the shielding means.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the shielding means is provided with a correcting means configured to come into contact with the displacing means disposed at a predetermined position, and the correcting means abuts the displacing means. The game machine H4 is configured such that the attitude of the displacement means can be corrected to the initial attitude side.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, even when the displacement means has an unexpected posture change, the shielding is performed when the displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position. Since the correction means of the means comes into contact with the displacement means to correct the posture change, the posture change can be corrected every time the displacement means is arranged at the predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from changing its posture beyond the allowable limit and colliding with the portion of the shielding means other than the correction means.

In the gaming machine H4, the correcting means includes a support stabilizing portion that stabilizes the support of the biasing means.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, the correction means can also be used as a means for preventing the biasing means from falling off. As a result, the number of members can be reduced and the functions can be integrated.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a gaming machine H6 characterized by comprising a second shielding means for shielding the shielding means against a specific direction (looking up).

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, even when the displacement means is arranged at a position where the rear side of the displacement means can be visually recognized in the specific direction view, The second shielding means can prevent the shielding means from being visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the biasing means from being seen in the specific direction.

In the gaming machine H6, the second shielding means is disposed in the displacement means, the gaming machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, it is possible to facilitate hiding the shielding means and the biasing means appropriately in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine K1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine Game machine K2. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F8, G1 to G8 and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
There is a game machine provided with an auxiliary member that assists the displacement of electric wiring (Patent Document 1: JP 2012-157474 A).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of members. The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the number of members can be reduced.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a gaming machine including a displacement means configured to be displaceable and an electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and a section in which the displacement means is displaced is , A section that is displaced to reduce the load on the electrical wiring.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the electric wiring is positioned at a predetermined portion outside the displacing means, and the displacing means guides the electric wiring. And a displaceable portion for reducing a change in distance between the guide portion and the predetermined portion.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and is configured to be capable of transmitting a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means toward the displacement means. Transmission means, and the electric wiring is arranged on the opposite side of the transmission means side with respect to the displacement means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the number of members can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the load applied to the electric wiring can be reduced by changing the positional relationship between the predetermined portion and the guide portion. ..
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the degree of freedom in arranging the electric wiring can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 60 base plate (game board)
60a Window (opening)
63 General prize openings (part of the entrance)
86, 2086 Center frame (a part of predetermined means)
86b1 Left boundary wall portion (first predetermined means)
86b2 Right boundary wall portion (second predetermined means)
100-104 board box 150 Left side production unit (part of the flow-down means)
153 Opposing plate part (a part of reflecting means)
155 Projection (part of projection)
156 1st protrusion part (2nd protrusion part)
157 Second protrusion (first protrusion)
158 Diffusion part 161 Base member (part of the first component)
161e Recessed portion (positioning recessed portion)
162 1st flow path member (a part of 2nd component member)
163 2nd flow path member (a part of 3rd component member)
165 Adjusting member (part of adjusting means)
410 Support Means (Part of Guide Means, Second Wiring Support Means)
413 Deformed hole (second opening)
460 Wiring auxiliary means (part of constituent means, part of receiving part)
463a Functional curved surface (a part of arrangement part)
510 fixing means (a part of constituent means)
511 U-shaped metal plate (part of the supporting means, first supporting means)
514 Left and right fixed lids (part of fixed members)
514b Extension frame part (a part of reduction part)
514e Hole for jig (opening)
516 Guide member (part of wiring supporting means, first wiring supporting means, part of wiring adjusting means)
517 Deformed hole (part of the opening, first opening)
517a Fastening part (part of limiting means, overhang part)
517b Fan-shaped adjusting part (part of limiting means, recessed part, part of wiring adjusting means)
519 Lower extension part (column part, part of entry part)
522 Right fixed bush (part of support means, second support means, part of wiring adjustment means)
537 Projection fastening part (part of limiting means)
541 Drive motor (drive means)
547 detection sensor (part of detection means, detection device)
560 Rotating body (part of rotating means)
577 Detected part (protruding part)
711 Metal slide rail (part of guide means)
718, 5718 Fixed shape part (predetermined part)
720, 3720 Displacement base member ( part of transmission means, part of intermediate means, part of displacement means)
731 Drive motor (drive means)
740 transmission means 744a curved shape part (a part of sudden stop means)
751 Cylindrical member with flange (supporting stable part)
760 Axis supported means (a part of displacement means)
763 Driven displacement member (base member)
764 Illuminated substrate (substrate)
765b Route section (guidance section)
788 Lower shield member (second shield means)
2086e Displacement part (a part of displacement member)
SP1 coil spring (part of biasing means)
SC1, SC3 Spring cover (part of shielding means)
DK1, DK2, DK3 Electric wiring SC3c Left and right extension (part of the correction means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable and electric wiring connected to the displacement means,
Driving means for generating a driving force, and the driving force of the driving means is displaced in a predetermined direction between the first position and the second position so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the displacing means. And a transmission means
The electric wiring is fixed at a predetermined portion outside the displacement means,
The displacement means includes a guide portion for guiding the electric wiring, and is displaced based on displacement of the transmission means in the predetermined direction,
When the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, the displacement means based on the displacement of the transmission means in the predetermined direction. Displacement of the guide portion in the predetermined direction,
When the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction from the predetermined position to the second position, the guide portion is opposed to the predetermined direction due to the displacement of the displacement means based on the displacement of the transmission means in the predetermined direction. The displacement amount of the guide portion with respect to the displacement amount of the transmission unit is reduced as compared with the case where the transmission unit is displaced toward the side and the transmission unit is displaced in the predetermined direction from the first position to the predetermined position. A gaming machine characterized by. Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein Rukoto comprising a substrate box.

Images